The ICF a framework for setting goals for children with speech impairment.pdf
-
Upload
rita-goncalves -
Category
Documents
-
view
112 -
download
0
description
Transcript of The ICF a framework for setting goals for children with speech impairment.pdf
The ICF a framework for setting goals forchildren with speech impairment
Sharynne McLeodSchool of Teacher Education Charles Sturt University Bathurst NSWAustralia
and
Ken BleileDepartment of Communicative Disorders University of Northern IowaCedar Falls Iowa USA
Abstract
The International Classification of Functioning Disability and Health (ICF)
(World Health Organization 2001) is proposed as a framework for integrative
goal setting for children with speech impairment The ICF incorporates both
impairment and social factors to consider when selecting appropriate goals to
bring about change in the lives of children with speech impairment Speech-
language therapists and teachers can work together not only to provide direct
intervention with the child but also to work in partnership with the childrsquos
family friends school and society
Children with speech impairment constitute one of the largest groups of
children with a communication difficulty (Harasty and Reed 1994) Difficulty
producing sounds as preschoolers may have influence on their subsequent
educational occupational and social opportunities throughout life (Felsenfeld
et al 1992 1994) Thus it is essential that careful planning occurs to ensure
that the goals set for these children and their families facilitate successful life-
long communication The aim of this paper is to provide speech-language
therapists (SLTs) and teachers with a meta-theory to scaffold their daily
decision making regarding children with speech impairment
Traditionally SLTs and teachers in special education have relied on an
impairment-based model of decision making The origins of the impairment
model may be attributed to the medical and behavioural origins of the professions
Address for correspondence Sharynne McLeod School of Teacher Education Charles Sturt UniversityPanorama Ave Bathurst NSW 2795 Australia E-mail smcleodcsueduau
Arnold 2004 101191=0265659004ct272oa
Child Language Teaching and Therapy 203 (2004) pp 199ndash219
According to Duchan (2001a 37) proponents of the impairment view lsquopresume
that the communication problem is in the client and that it can be remedied by
providing the client with missing knowledge or processing skillsrsquo Thus follow-
ing the impairment-based model childrenrsquos speech is assessed according to
standardized assessment tools their production of speech sounds is compared
with available norms and decisions regarding the existence and=or extent
of impairment are made Subsequent impairment-based goals could include
increasing speech sounds within a childrsquos repertoire decreasing the occurrence of
cluster reduction or expanding the syllable shapes used by the child The
impairment-based model relies heavily on the expertise of the lsquoprofessionalrsquo
(in this case the SLT) who typically conducts the assessments and analyses and
determines goals based on areas of impairment The family and teachers have less
input into the goal setting in the impairment-based model (Reynolds 1984)
Alternatively many teachers and some SLTs have adopted a social model of
decision making In the social model lsquo therapy plans centre around selected
life goals and what needs to be done to achieve them (and) emphasize the
communicative impact of the clientrsquos differences rather than the clientrsquos
deficitsrsquo (Duchan 2001a 38 39) Some proponents of the social model
also present disability as a part of life and the source of the problem as a
society that is not inclusive of people with disability (Hersh 1999 Jordan and
Kaiser 1996) A social model of goal setting validates and necessitates
extensive support from the family teachers and the children themselves as
the lsquoexpertsrsquo Thus the role of the teacher and SLT is to facilitate the dialogue
toward the development of socially appropriate goals For example the SLT
might ask about events that made the child feel lsquoparticularly good and
particularly badrsquo during the current school year (Nelson 1989 176) and use
these critical incidents as a framework for identification of relevant goals
Both impairment and social models can be valid (for an insightful debate see
the Clinical Forum led by Duchan 2001a) A meta-theory that draws on both the
impairment and social models has been developed by the World Health
Organization (WHO 2001) The initial version (WHO 1980) was grounded
in a medical (impairment) model and used the terms impairment disability and
handicap The final version integrated impairment and social models to describe
the health and health-related status of all people and is called The International
Classification of Functioning Disability and Health (ICF) (WHO 2001)
There are two parts to the ICF Table 1 illustrates the interactions between the
parts and components of the ICF Part I is titled lsquoFunctioning and disabilityrsquo and
describes health from the perspectives of the body the individual and society
and includes the components of body structures body functions activities and
participation Body structures refer to the anatomical parts of the body such as
200 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Ta
ble
1A
pp
lica
tio
no
fIC
Fto
asp
ee
cha
nd
lan
gu
ag
ea
sse
ssm
en
tin
ord
er
toin
form
go
al
sett
ing
ICF
pa
rts
ICF
com
po
ne
nts
ICF
de
scri
pto
rsre
lati
ng
toco
mm
un
icati
on
Po
ssib
leco
mp
on
en
tso
fa
nS
LT
ass
ess
me
nt
an
da
na
lysi
sIm
pa
irm
en
t-b
ase
dg
oa
lsS
oci
ally
-ba
sed
go
als
IF
un
ctio
nin
ga
nd
dis
ab
ilit
yB
od
yst
ruct
ure
s
A
na
tom
yo
fn
ose
m
ou
th
ph
ary
nx
la
ryn
x
Ge
ne
tic
ma
teri
al
C
on
du
cta
no
rom
usc
u-
lar
ex
am
ina
tio
na
nd
au
dio
log
ica
la
sse
ss-
me
nt
R
eq
ue
sta
me
dic
al
ex
am
ina
tio
n
S
urg
ica
lre
pa
iro
fcr
an
iofa
cia
la
no
ma
ly
Co
chle
ar
imp
lan
t
P
rom
ote
soci
eta
la
cce
pta
nce
of
div
ers
ity
of
the
ap
pe
ara
nce
of
pe
op
le
En
cou
rag
ed
aily
no
seb
low
ing
tore
du
ceo
ccu
rre
nce
so
fo
titi
sm
ed
ia
Bo
dy
fun
ctio
ns
P
rod
uct
ion
an
dq
ua
lity
of
vo
ice
A
rtic
ula
tio
no
fp
ho
ne
me
s
Ex
pre
ssio
no
fsp
oke
nla
ng
ua
ge
C
on
du
cta
sse
ssm
en
to
fsp
ee
chso
un
ds=
ph
on
olo
gic
alp
roce
sse
sv
oic
ea
nd
lan
gu
ag
e
An
aly
sesp
ee
cha
nd
lan
gu
ag
esa
mp
le
Re
qu
est
an
ed
uca
tio
na
la
sse
ssm
en
to
fre
ad
ing
an
dw
riti
ng
R
ed
uce
au
dib
len
asa
le
mis
sio
nd
uri
ng
the
pro
du
ctio
no
fh
igh
-pre
ssu
reco
nso
na
nts
E
sta
blish
sta
ble
an
da
ccu
rate
pro
du
ctio
ns
thu
sre
du
cin
gth
ev
ari
ab
ilit
yo
fe
rro
rs
In
cre
ase
inte
llig
ibilit
yb
yd
ecr
ea
sin
gth
eu
seo
fp
ho
no
-lo
gic
al
pro
cess
es
con
trib
uti
ng
tou
nin
tellig
ibilit
y(c
fH
od
son
an
dP
ad
en
1
98
1)
R
ed
uce
spe
ech
pa
tte
rns
tha
ta
reu
nu
sua
l(e
g
init
ial
con
son
an
td
ele
tio
n)
or
no
tco
nsi
de
red
tob
elsquon
orm
al
err
ors
rsquo(S
mit
1
99
3)
C
orr
ect
lyp
rod
uce
ph
on
em
es
tha
th
av
ea
hig
hfr
eq
ue
ncy
of
occ
urr
en
ce
Act
ivit
ya
nd
pa
rtic
ipa
tio
n(c
on
sid
er
pe
rfo
rma
nce
ve
rsu
sca
pa
city
)
C
om
mu
nic
ati
ng
wit
hndash
rece
ivin
gndash
spo
ken
me
ssa
ge
s
Sp
ea
kin
g
Co
nv
ers
ati
on
L
ea
rnin
ga
nd
ap
ply
ing
kno
wle
dg
ein
clu
din
gle
arn
ing
tore
ad
an
dw
rite
In
terp
ers
on
al
inte
ract
ion
sa
nd
rela
tio
nsh
ips
C
on
du
ctin
tellig
ibilit
ya
sse
ssm
en
t
Ga
the
rq
ua
lita
tiv
ed
esc
rip
tio
ns
of
succ
ess
es
an
dd
iffi
cul-
tie
sin
pa
rtic
ipa
tio
nin
the
fam
ily
sc
ho
ol
soci
al
situ
ati
on
s
C
orr
ect
lyp
ron
ou
nce
the
child
rsquosn
am
ea
sw
ell
as
the
na
me
so
fsi
gn
ifica
nt
oth
ers
P
ron
ou
nce
wo
rds
the
child
wo
uld
like
tosa
ya
nd=o
rh
as
be
en
tea
sed
ab
ou
t
C
olla
bo
rate
wit
hth
ech
ild
rsquoste
ach
er
top
rom
ote
com
mu
ni-
cati
ve
succ
ess
in
clu
din
gst
rate
gie
sto
rep
air
com
mu
ni-
cati
on
bre
akd
ow
ns
W
ork
wit
ha
child
rsquosp
ee
rso
na
wa
ren
ess
of
com
mu
nic
ati
ve
bre
akd
ow
na
nd
stra
teg
ies
tou
se
eg
a
skin
gfo
rre
pe
titi
on
o
rlsquos
ho
wm
ersquo
(co
nti
nu
ed
)
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 201
Ta
ble
1C
on
tin
ue
d
ICF
pa
rts
ICF
com
po
ne
nts
ICF
de
scri
pto
rsre
lati
ng
toco
mm
un
ica
tio
n
Po
ssib
leco
mp
on
en
tso
fa
nS
LT
ass
ess
me
nt
an
da
na
lysi
sIm
pa
irm
en
t-b
ase
dg
oa
lsS
oci
ally
-ba
sed
go
als
P
resc
ho
ol
ed
uca
tio
n
Co
mm
un
ity
so
cia
la
nd
civ
iclife
P
rom
ote
com
mu
nic
ati
ve
succ
ess
by
ma
inta
inin
ga
dia
ryo
fsi
gn
ifica
nt
ev
en
tsth
at
the
child
ma
yw
an
tto
com
mu
ni-
cate
an
dke
ep
ing
alist
on
the
frid
ge
of
the
child
rsquosp
ron
un
-ci
ati
on
so
fim
po
rta
nt
wo
rds
II
Co
nte
xtu
al
fact
ors
En
vir
on
me
nta
lfa
cto
rs
P
rod
uct
sa
nd
tech
no
log
y
Su
pp
ort
an
dre
lati
on
ship
s
Att
itu
de
s
Se
rvic
es
syst
em
sa
nd
po
lici
es
D
ete
rmin
ep
are
nta
lw
ide
rfa
mily
an
dsc
ho
ol
inv
olv
em
en
ta
nd
sup
po
rt
De
term
ine
att
itu
de
sa
nd
ex
pe
cta
tio
ns
of
the
child
rsquosfa
mily
an
dco
mm
un
ity
reg
ard
ing
soci
al
occ
up
ati
on
al
an
de
du
cati
on
al
asp
ira
tio
ns
D
ete
rmin
eg
ov
ern
me
nta
lp
olici
es
reg
ard
ing
the
nu
mb
er
of
fun
de
din
ter-
ve
nti
on
sess
ion
se
tc
mdashmdash
Pe
rso
na
lfa
cto
rsA
ttri
bu
tes
of
the
pe
rso
n
an
dth
ein
tern
al
infl
ue
nce
so
nfu
nct
ion
ing
an
dd
isa
bilit
y
D
iscu
ssth
ein
flu
en
ceo
fa
ge
of
child
se
lf-
con
fid
en
ce
mo
tiv
ati
on
att
en
tio
n
cog
nit
ive
ab
ilit
y
be
lie
fs
lea
rnin
gst
yle
a
nd
ex
pe
rie
nce
wit
hco
mm
un
ica
tio
nfa
ilu
re
mdashmdash
202 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
the nose mouth pharynx and larynx Body functions describes lsquothe physiolo-
gical functions of body systemsrsquo (WHO 2001 10) Included in the category of
body functions are lsquovoice functionsrsquo such as production and quality of voice
lsquospeech functionsrsquo including the articulation of phonemes and lsquomental func-
tions of languagersquo including expression of spoken language Activity is lsquothe
execution of a task by an individualrsquo (WHO 2001 10) and participation
describes the involvement in a life situation Thus under the heading of activity
and participation communication in its many forms is included as an entire
chapter within the ICF (chapter 3) Some of the highlighted aspects of
communication include lsquoCommunicating with ndash receiving ndash spoken messagesrsquo
lsquospeakingrsquo and lsquoconversationrsquo Other relevant categories of activity and
participation include learning and applying knowledge (chapter 1) such as
lsquolearning to readrsquo and lsquolearning to writersquo Additionally activities and participa-
tion include interpersonal interactions and relationships (chapter 7) major life
areas such as preschool education (chapter 8) and community social and civic
life (chapter 9) Finally the term disability lsquoserves as an umbrella term for
impairments activity limitation and participation restrictionsrsquo (WHO 2001 3)
Part 2 of the ICF is titled lsquoContextual factorsrsquo and includes environmental and
personal factors (see Table 1) Environmental factors lsquomake up the physical
social and attitudinal environment in which people live and conduct their livesrsquo
(WHO 2001 10) and can be facilitators or barriers Environmental factors
relevant to communication include products and technology (chapter 1) support
and relationships (chapter 3) attitudes (chapter 4) services systems and policies
(chapter 5) Personal factors include the attributes of the person and the internal
influences on functioning and disability Due to the individuality of this WHO
component personal factors are not specified as chapters within the ICF
Within the field of communication disorders there has been some use of the
ICF (and its predecessors) as a meta-theory for practice (for example American
Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Threats 2000 2001 Worrall
1999 2001) The application of the ICF (and its predecessors) has particularly
occurred within the context of SLTs working with adults who have dementia
experienced a stroke or acquired brain injury (for example Bourgeois 1998
Hersh 1999 Worrall 1999) with adults who have voice disorders (Ma and Yiu
2001a 2001b) including those who use alaryngeal speech (Eadie 2003) There
have also been some descriptions of the use of a social model of interaction in
speech and language practice with children (for example Duchan 2001a 2001b
Kovarsky 2001 Locke 2000) but limited direct application of the ICF to the
consideration of the speech of children The exception is the excellent work by
Hodge (1983) who applied the original 1980 version of the WHO model to
assessment and intervention practices with a child who had a speech impairment
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 203
In order to explore the application of the ICF to child language teaching and
therapy each of the parts and components of the ICF will be discussed with
relation to childrenrsquos speech production Table 1 lists each of the parts and
components of the ICF and their application to a speech and language assess-
ment in order to inform goal setting Many of these assessments and analyses are
typically included in traditional SLT assessments (see the forum led by Williams
2002) For example oromuscular examinations and audiological assessments are
conducted to assess body structures An SLT assessment of speech sounds and
phonology are conducted to assess body functions However it is less likely that
SLTs consider activity and participation contextual and personal factors
Conversely teachers frequently consider activity and participation of children
Possible methods of evaluating activity and participation include an intelligibility
assessment or by gathering qualitative descriptions of successes and difficulties
in participation in the family school and social situations Determination of
parental wider family and school involvement support attitudes and expecta-
tions comprises evaluation of contextual factors Personal factors can include the
age of the child self-confidence motivation attention cognitive ability beliefs
learning style and experience with communication failure on intervention
Although there is close interrelationship between each of these areas goals
will be suggested for parts and components
Goals targeting functioning and disability
Body structures and functions
Children who are described as having a communication impairment of
(known) origin usually have impaired body structure(s) Impairment of body
structures can include a cleft palate anklyglossia or a malformed cochlea
among other examples Impairment-based goal setting for children with
impaired body structures often includes medical intervention such as surgical
repair of a cleft or a cochlear implant With the advancement of medical
science there is the potential for a decreasing need for extensive speech
intervention for people with impairment of body structures For example
Golding-Kushner (1995 327) has written that lsquoApproximately 80 of
children born with nonsyndromic cleft palate who undergo palate repair by
18 months of age develop speech free from compensatory errors without any
type of therapeutic interventionrsquo A social goal addressing impairment of body
structures could aim to promote societal acceptance of diversity of the
appearance of people For example a popular television show could include
a child who has a craniofacial anomaly in order to promote inclusiveness
204 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Impaired body structure can result in impaired body function For example
a person with a cleft palate may have nasal emission during speech An
impairment-based speech goal could therefore include reduction of audible
nasal emission during the production of high-pressure consonants (stops
fricatives and affricates) (Harding and Grunwell 1998) This may have the
social advantage of being more intelligible and less different or obtrusive
Other more subtle impairments in body structure and function that
influence speech production can be detected via oromusculature examination
(for example Ozanne 1992 Robbins and Klee 1987) with examples of
impaired body structure including tongue-tie and examples of body function
impairment include difficulty on diadochokinesis (rapid speech movement)
tasks Debate exists as to the impact on speech production as a result of these
more subtle impairments of body structure and function Similarly strong
debate surrounds the use of oral-motor exercises to facilitate speech sound
acquisition in children with speech impairment Lof (2003 9) provides a
summary of this debate and concludes the lsquothere is little if any theoretical
philosophical or clinical justification for using oral motor exercises to improve
speech sound production skillsrsquo
Impairments of body structure and function relating to hearing can be
detected via audiological examination such as tympanometry An example of
impairment of body structure is otitis media (glue ear) while an example of
body function impairment is hearing loss Controversy surrounds the inter-
relationship between otitis media (impaired body structure) and speech
perception=production (body function) Shriberg et al (2000a 2000b) has
altered the debate about whether or not otitis media is the cause of speech
impairment to the notion that there is increased risk of speech impairment as a
result of occurrences of otitis media However Campbell et al (2003 353)
found that lsquopersistent otitis media in the first three years of life did not
significantly increase the risk of speech delay after controlling for relevant
covariatesrsquo A social intervention relating to aural body structure and function
differences is the Healthy Little Ears project a health promotion project with
children in Australia (Mid Western Area Health Service 1999) Within this
programme children are encouraged to blow their nose each day to increase
functioning of the eustachian tube and decrease the occurrence of otitis
media
Genetics research has opened new areas of knowledge of impairment at the
micro level of body structure It may be the case that genetic abnormality may
account for children exhibiting impaired body function but previously thought
of as having intact body structures For example Lai et al (2001) described the
FOXP2 gene chromosome 7 as relating to speech apraxia Flipsen et al (2001)
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 205
have described acoustic markers that are indicative for genetic studies of
speech impairment The influence of these genetic breakthroughs on goal
setting in speech intervention may include discussion of familial histories
(for example Lewis et al 1989 Lewis and Freebairn 1993) and genetic
counselling Early intervention opportunities may be made for younger family
members of the child referred for speech intervention Early identification
can also lead to intervention opportunities to support academic success
particularly with respect to reading and spelling (Lewis et al 2000)
To date the majority of children who are seen by SLTs have communication
impairments of unknown origin (Shriberg et al 1986) indicating that their
body structure is considered to be intact These children have difficulty with
body functions such as the production of speech sounds Traditional SLT
measures of the speech function of these children have included the array of
articulation=phonology tests such as the Edinburgh Articulation Test (Anthony
et al 1971) and the Computerized Articulation and Phonology Evaluation
System (CAPES) (Masterson and Bernhardt 2002) The range of speech
analyses includes phonological analyses [for example Profile of Phonology
(PROPHthorn ) Long et al 2002] nonlinear analyses (Bernhardt and Stemberger
2000) and psycholinguistic analyses (Stackhouse and Wells 1993) Addition-
ally objective measures including acoustic (for example spectrographic) and
physiological (for example electropalatographic Gibbon 1999) tools are
enabling more accurate description of speech (Ball et al 2001) Children
with speech impairments may receive assessment reports concluding with
impairment-based goals such as to increase the percentage of consonants
correct (PCC) decrease the occurrence of various phonological processes or to
produce a list of phonemes expected but not produced correctly by the child
For children with impaired speech function there has been extensive debate
among SLTs regarding appropriate intervention goals Two dichotomous
approaches to goal selection have been proposed First the most knowledge
method (also called the traditional or developmental approach) and second the
least knowledge method (nontraditional nondevelopmental approach) (Bleile
1995) For the most knowledge method intervention goals differ minimally
from the sounds the child already produces (Elbert and Gierut 1986) That is
sounds or phonological processes are selected as intervention goals because
they are earlier developing stimulable and produced correctly in particular
contextual environments (Bernthal and Bankson 1998) In contrast in the least
knowledge method lsquo treatment targets differ from the childrsquos existing abilities
by multiple featuresrsquo (Elbert and Gierut 1986) Therefore sounds or processes
are selected because they are nonstimulable phonetically more complex have
phonologically marked properties reflect least phonological knowledge as
206 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
categorized by inventory constraints (with respect to phonemes) and are later
acquired (Gierut et al 1996) Gierut (1998) provides evidence that treatment
goals are achieved efficiently if children are taught sounds or sound pairs that
are not in a childrsquos pretreatment repertoire and developmentally later-acquired
sounds that are phonetically more complex acoustically undifferentiated and
nonstimulable that is following the least knowledge approach In contrast
Rvachew and Nowak (2001) compared the most knowledge (traditional) and
least knowledge (nontraditional) approaches for 48 children with moderate to
severe phonological disorders The study had four major findings children
made more progress toward acquiring target sounds through a traditional
approach the approaches did not differ in generalization from treated to
untreated sounds children liked both approaches parents were more favourable
to the traditional approach These authors have debated their different inter-
pretations of the outcomes of selecting the traditional and nontraditional
approaches in Morrisette and Gierut (2003) and Rvachew and Nowak (2003)
However Williams (2003) adds another dimension to this debate in her helpful
overview and discussion of five approaches to target selection As well as
the traditional and nontraditional approaches she includes markedness the
systemic function of sounds within a given sound system contrastive sounds
and lexical properties of treatment words She concludes by advocating more
research that addresses the impact of additive relationships between these
different approaches
Some questions following on from these approaches to impairment-based
goal selection by SLTs include the following Should treatment goals include
sounds for which the child is not stimulable (Powell 2003) Do children learn
sounds that are stimulable without having to be taught (Elbert and Gierut
1986 Powell and Miccio 1996) Should treatment goals target later-acquired
sounds Does teaching later-acquired sounds facilitate linguistic generaliza-
tion more readily than teaching earlier-acquired ones (Gierut 1998 Rvachew
and Nowak 2001) Although these questions need to be asked it is not
possible to predict with certainty what the most appropriate goal is for an
individual child In order to appropriately answer questions such as these
SLTs need to add to their impairment-based approach focusing on body
structures and functions The ICF provides additional areas of consideration to
enable appropriate goal setting for each individual
Activities and participation
The ICF model specifies consideration of activities and participation in
facilitating health and well-being Some that have relevance to children with
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 207
speech impairment include speaking conversation learning and applying
knowledge interpersonal interactions and relationships community social
and civic life Each of these will be addressed with relation to children with
speech impairment
Within the last decade SLTs have appropriated measures of activity and
participation that consider (to some extent) the social impact of speaking and
conversation One measure of activity that has been formalized as an assess-
ment practice is the level of intelligibility (Bleile 1995 Kent et al 1994
Kwiatkowski and Shriberg 1992) The Childrenrsquos Speech Intelligibility
Measure (Wilcox and Morris 1999) is one commercially available sampling
tool to quantify the extent of intelligibility of individual childrenrsquos speech by
untrained listeners There are few examples of ways in which SLTs consider
participation within speaking and conversation by children with speech
impairment One example is the Therapy Outcomes Measure (Enderby and
John 1997) which includes a specific subsection on childrenrsquos speech
Consideration of activities and participation also includes the influence of
the impairment on learning and applying knowledge With the high co-
occurrence of children with speech impairments having reading and spelling
difficulties (Larrivee and Catts 1999) it is essential that goals are developed
around the facilitation of academic skills (Hodson 1994) Intervention
targeting phonological awareness should accompany speech intervention
(Gillon 2000) Partnerships between teachers and SLTs are essential for
appropriate goal setting to facilitate successful oral and literate communicative
skills throughout the lives of these children
Further SLTs and teachers can consider interpersonal interactions and
relationships in their intervention planning for children with speech impair-
ment Pertinent social assessment practices may consist of a discussion with
the child his=her parents siblings friends grandparents and other significant
people to ascertain social goals and barriers interests and hopes (Duchan
2001a) Pretty (1995) suggested a number of goals congruent with a social
model for a four-year old girl with severe speech impairment The goals
focused on the interpersonal interactions and relationships with her family
teacher friends peers and peersrsquo parents For example the teacher and SLT
collaborated to promote communicative success at preschool including
strategies to repair communication breakdowns encouraging a group of her
peers to ask for repetition when they did not understand BJ or to ask BJ to
lsquoshow mersquo BJrsquos family were encouraged to look at her when she spoke to them
use all available cues (for example maintaining a diary of significant events
that she may want to communicate) and keep a list of BJrsquos pronunciations of
important words (for example the name of her best friend) These goals based
208 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
on activity and participation can readily be adapted for any child with a speech
impairment
Finally consideration of community social and civic life of children with
speech impairment is rarely discussed However there is scope for socially
based intervention goals to facilitate activity and participation in this context
Friends can be encouraged to spend time talking and babbling with a baby
who has a craniofacial anomaly in order to develop social interactions despite
the fact that the child may look different and have reduced time for social
interaction due to the extensive amount of time spent feeding Another
example of a social goal for people with a hearing impairment would consist
of public education to decrease background noise and to encourage people to
look at a person with a hearing impairment while talking with them
When considering activity and participation the ICF allows for comparison
between performance and capacity There may be a mismatch between a
childrsquos performance within their daily lives and their communicative capacity
on standardized speech assessment tools At times children are more capable
within the confines of a standardized assessment than they demonstrate within
the complex communicative demands of the classroom At other times
children exhibit a variety of compensatory strategies to minimize commu-
nicative difficulty that is evident on standardized assessment tasks Considera-
tion of performance and capacity is an important component within the
capability focus model described by Kwiatkowski and Shriberg (1993
1998) who have successfully tested this with hundreds of children who
have received speech intervention Even while undertaking standardized
assessment tools there may be a mismatch between performance on one
versus another demonstrating the mismatch between performance and capa-
city Some areas of difference include single word versus connected speech
(McLeod et al 1994 Morrison and Shriberg 1992) imitated versus sponta-
neous speech (Leonard et al 1978) stimulable versus nonstimulable sounds
(Powell and Miccio 1996) monosyllabic versus polysyllabic words (James et
al 2002) The difference between a childrsquos communicative performance and
capacity should be considered when developing appropriate goals
Contextual factors
Environmental factors
Some of the environmental factors mentioned by WHO that relate to children
with speech impairment include products and technology support and
relationships attitudes and services systems and policies
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 209
There is a burgeoning industry of products and technology utilizing speech-
activated devices for tasks such as computer operation word processing home
banking navigation and telephone directory assistance Intelligible speech is
essential for the use of speech-activated devices and can place restrictions on
the lives of adults who have residual speech impairments (Griffin et al 2001)
While children with speech impairment currently are not affected by this
technology if intelligible speech is not achieved by adulthood incorporation
within future society may be limited Further with the advances of technology
it is possible that speech-activated devices may be a common part of living for
children and adults alike
Probably the most important environmental factor relating to children with
speech impairment is support and relationships The incorporation of parental
support into the intervention practices is frequently a key to success (see
Bowen this issue) There is some research suggesting links between inter-
vention outcomes and environmental factors such as socioeconomic status
maternal IQ and maternal educational level (Chan et al 1998) Wider
networks of family friends and teachers are also important environmental
influences
Societal attitudes towards children adolescents and adults with speech
impairments are frequently negative (Crowe Hall 1991 Madison 1992
Silverman and Falk 1992) For example Silverman and Paulus (1989)
compared childrenrsquos attitudes towards a child who uses=w=for=r=with a typical
speaker The child with the mild speech impairment was considered to be less
talkative and hear less well than his=her peers dysfluent unpleasant to listen
to soft boring dull more tense nervous afraid handicapped isolated
uncomfortable Further Anderson and Antonak (1992) found that social
acceptance of an actor with a mild speech sound impairment was less
positive than the same actor demonstrating a physical disability Research
by Felsenfeld et al (1992) adds another dimension people with speech
impairment were found to be less extroverted and socialized with fewer
people than people with typical speech development Clearly people with
speech impairment may be compromised by societal attitudes necessitating
goals directed towards society as well as working at the impairment level
The services systems and policies relating to individual children are as
varied as each individual and can influence the type of schooling the child
receives the type and amount of support the child receives at school whether
a child is eligible for SLT intervention and so forth Political factors can affect
the actuality of intervention for individual clients For example in some health
sectors within the USA the politicization of health care dictates the number of
SLT sessions a person with a particular impairment can receive Philosophical
210 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
attitudes toward the labelling of a child with a speech or language impairment
can influence the type of goals developed for a child (Christensen and Baker
2002 Green and Kostogriz 2002) For example McDermott (1993 272) has
argued that lsquothere is no such thing as LD [Learning Disability] only a social
practice of displaying noticing documenting remediating and explaining itrsquo
McLeod (2003) described the distinction between the use of the terms
lsquonormalrsquo and lsquotypicalrsquo and SLTsrsquo role in the categorization of children along
the normalndashabnormal divide Simmons-Mackie (2001) described differing
clinical assumptions leading to differing intervention approaches A childrsquos
experiences of receiving intervention from different people with differing
clinical assumptions is documented by Kovarsky (2001) Thus services
systems and policies can play a role in goal setting for children with speech
impairment
Personal factors
Attached to every lsquospeech impairmentrsquo is a real child (Bleile 1991) His or her
unique makeup must be considered within his=her cultural milieu in order to
determine the most appropriate intervention goals The ICF (WHO 2001 8)
recognizes the lsquolarge social and cultural variancersquo including gender age other
health conditions coping style social background education profession past
experience and character style Currently research into typically developing
children has demonstrated the wide range of individual differences (for
example McLeod et al 2001) For children with speech impairment there
are some case studies documenting the effect of personal factors on appro-
priate goal setting and intervention outcomes For example Kamhi (2000)
describes the progress of phonological intervention with his daughter Franne
Frannersquos lsquostubbornnessrsquo and desire to communicate with her parents led to
delineation between speech sound practice with her SLT and meaningful
communication with her parents He writes lsquoFrannersquos reluctance to practise
speech sounds was her way to let us know that we should focus on what
she said when she spoke rather than on how she said itrsquo (Kamhi 2000 183)
One important and documented factor to consider in the selection of speech
goals is the childrsquos personal ability to evaluate his=her speech Self-evaluation
occurs when the child judges the accuracy of his=her response prior to explicit
feedback from the clinician (cf Koegel et al 1986) lsquoSelf-evaluation appears
to be a central concept within diverse theoretical views of normal speech
development and within approaches to and explications of successful
interventionrsquo (Shriberg and Kwiatkowski 1987 154) Thus SLTs can incor-
porate self-evaluation within the intervention goals
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 211
Conclusion What goals are appropriate
It can be argued that the ultimate goal of speech intervention is to bring about
correct production of speech sounds resulting in intelligible conversational
speech within a childrsquos milieu (cf Kamhi 2000 Powell 1991) However
other similarly important goals may be to enhance a childrsquos participation in
social interaction to increase self-esteem or to decrease negative societal
attitudes towards people with speech impairment The ICF is a meta-theory
that allows for consideration of all these possibilities and is enhanced by
collaboration between SLTs and teachers A summary of possible goals
relating to the ICF is provided in Table 1 The most important outcome of
the present discussion is to reiterate that every child is unique requiring a
different approach to best meet their needs (Lowe 1994) Thus it is important
to consider all the factors before making a decision then to devise goals in
consultation and monitor progress (see Baker and McLeod this issue)
Continual revision and consultation will result in appropriate outcomes for
individual children as well as society
References
American Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Scope of practice in
speech-language pathology Rockville MD ASHA
Anderson R J and Antonak R F 1992 The influence of attitudes and
contact on reactions to persons with physical and speech disabilities
Rehabilitation Counselling Bulletin 35 240ndash47
Anthony A Bogle D Ingram T T S and McIsaac M W 1971 The
Edinburgh articulation test Edinburgh E and S Livingstone
Baker E and McLeod S 2004 Evidence-based management of children with
phonological impairment of unknown origin Child Language Teaching
and Therapy 20 261ndash85
Ball M J Gracco V and Stone M 2001 A comparison of imaging
techniques for the investigation of normal and disordered speech produc-
tion Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 313ndash24
Bernhardt B H and Stemberger J P 2000 Workbook in nonlinear phonology
for clinical application Austin TX ProEd
Bernthal J E and Bankson N W 1998 Articulation and phonological
disorders 4th edition Boston Allyn and Bacon
Bleile K M 1991 Individual differences In Bleile K M editor Child
phonology a book of exercises for students San Diego CA Singular 57ndash71
212 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Bleile K M 1995 Manual of articulation and phonological disorders San
Diego CA Singular
Bourgeois M S 1998 Functional outcome assessment of adults with
dementia Seminars in Speech and Hearing 19 261ndash75
Bowen C 2004 Child Language Teaching and Therapy 20 245ndash60
Campbell T F Dollaghan C A Rockette H E Paradise J L Feldman H
M Shriberg L D Sabo D L and Kurs-Lasky M 2003 Risk factors
for speech delay of unknown origin in 3-year-old children Child
Development 74 346ndash57
Chan A McAllister L and Wilson L 1998 An investigation of the agendash
MLU relationship and factors which predict MLU in two and three year
old Australian children Asia Pacific Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing 3 97ndash108
Christensen C A and Baker C D 2002 Pedagogy observation and
the construction of learning disability Pedagogy Culture and Society
10 73ndash93
Crowe Hall B J 1991 Attitudes of fourth and sixth graders toward peers with
mild articulation disorders Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 22 334ndash40
Duchan J F 2001a Impairment and social views of speech-language
pathology clinical practices re-examined Advances in Speech-Language
Pathology 3 37ndash46
Duchan J F 2001b Social and impairment approaches viewed in a forest and
in the shadows of a city street Advances in Speech-Language Pathology
3 73ndash79
Eadie T L 2003 The ICF A proposed framework for comprehensive
rehabilitation of individuals who use alaryngeal speech American
Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 12 189ndash97
Elbert M and Gierut J A 1986 Handbook of clinical phonology
approaches to assessment and treatment London Taylor amp Francis
Enderby P and John A 1997 Therapy outcome measures speech-language
pathology technical manual London Singular
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1992 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder linguistic
and personality results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35
1114ndash25
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1994 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder educational
and occupational results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37
1341ndash53
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 213
Flipsen P Shriberg L D Weismer G Karlsson H B and McSweeny J L
2001 Acoustic phenotypes for speech-genetics studies reference data for
residual =3= distortions Clinical Linguistics and Phonetics 15 603ndash30
Gibbon F E 1999 Undifferentiated lingual gestures in children with
articulation=phonological disorders Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing Research 42 382ndash97
Gierut J A 1998 Treatment efficacy functional phonological disorders in
children Journal of Speech Language Hearing Research 41 S85ndash100
Gierut J A Morrisette M L Hughes M T and Rowland S 1996
Phonological treatment efficacy and developmental norms Language
Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 27 215ndash30
Gillon G T 2000 The efficacy of phonological awareness intervention for
children with spoken language impairment Language Speech and Hear-
ing Services in Schools 31 126ndash41
Goldman R and Fristoe M 1986 Goldman Fristoe Test of Articulation
Revised Circle Pines MN American Guidance Service
Green B and Kostogriz A 2002 Learning difficulties and the new literacy
studies a socially critical perspective In Soler J Wearmouth J and
Reid G editors Contextualising difficulties in literacy development
exploring politics culture ethnicity and ethics Milton Keynes The Open
University
Griffin S Wilson L Clark L and McLeod S 2001 Speech pathology
applications of automatic speech recognition technology In Wilson L
and Hewat S editors Proceedings of the 2001 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
293ndash99
Golding-Kushner K 1995 Treatment of articulation and resonance disorders
associated with cleft palate and VPI In Shprintzen R and Bardach J
editors Cleft palate speech management a multidisciplinary approach
St Louis Mosby 327ndash63
Harasty J and Reed V A 1994 The prevalence of speech and language
impairment in two Sydney metropolitan schools Australian Journal of
Human Communication Disorders 22 1ndash23
Harding A and Grunwell P 1998 Active versus passive cleft-type speech
characteristics International Journal of Language and Communication
Disorders 33 329ndash52
Hersh D 1999 Impairment to empowerment social model theory and
aphasia therapy In McLeod S and McAllister L editors Proceedings
of the 1999 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 125ndash30
214 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Hodge M 1983 Assessment and treatment of a child with a developmental
speech disorder a biological behavioural perspective Seminars in Speech
and Language 14 128ndash41
Hodson B W 1994 Helping individuals become intelligible literate and
articulate the role of phonology Topics in Language Disorders 14 1ndash16
Hodson B W and Paden E P 1981 Phonological processes which
characterize unintelligible and intelligible speech in early childhood
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 46 369ndash73
James D van Doorn J and McLeod S 2002 Segment production in mono-
di- and polysyllabic words in children aged 3ndash7 years In Windsor F
Kelly L and Hewlett N editors Themes in Clinical Phonetics and
Linguistics Hillsdale NJ Lawrence Erlbaum 287ndash98
Jordan L and Kaiser W 1996 Aphasia a social approach London
Chapman and Hall
Kamhi A G 2000 Practice makes perfect the incompatibility of practicing
speech and meaningful communication Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 31 182ndash85
Kent R D Miolo G and Bloedel S 1994 The intelligibility of childrenrsquos
speech a review of evaluation procedures American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 3 81ndash95
Koegel L K Koegel R L and Costello-Ingham J 1986 Programming
rapid generalization of correct articulation through self-monitoring proce-
dures Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 24ndash32
Kovarsky D 2001 Ruminating on impairments-based assessment and inter-
vention Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 59ndash62
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1992 Intelligibility assessment in
developmental phonological disorders accuracy of caregiver gloss
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35 1095ndash1104
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1993 Speech normalization in develop-
mental phonological disorders a retrospective study of capability-focus
theory Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 24 10ndash18
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1998 The capability-focus treatment
framework for child speech disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 7 27ndash38
Lai C S L Fisher S E Hurst J A Vargha-Khadem F and Monaco A P
2001 A forkhead-domain gene is mutated in severe speech and language
disorder Nature 413 519ndash23
Larrivee L S and Catts H W 1999 Early reading achievement in children
with expressive phonological disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 8 118ndash28
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 215
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
According to Duchan (2001a 37) proponents of the impairment view lsquopresume
that the communication problem is in the client and that it can be remedied by
providing the client with missing knowledge or processing skillsrsquo Thus follow-
ing the impairment-based model childrenrsquos speech is assessed according to
standardized assessment tools their production of speech sounds is compared
with available norms and decisions regarding the existence and=or extent
of impairment are made Subsequent impairment-based goals could include
increasing speech sounds within a childrsquos repertoire decreasing the occurrence of
cluster reduction or expanding the syllable shapes used by the child The
impairment-based model relies heavily on the expertise of the lsquoprofessionalrsquo
(in this case the SLT) who typically conducts the assessments and analyses and
determines goals based on areas of impairment The family and teachers have less
input into the goal setting in the impairment-based model (Reynolds 1984)
Alternatively many teachers and some SLTs have adopted a social model of
decision making In the social model lsquo therapy plans centre around selected
life goals and what needs to be done to achieve them (and) emphasize the
communicative impact of the clientrsquos differences rather than the clientrsquos
deficitsrsquo (Duchan 2001a 38 39) Some proponents of the social model
also present disability as a part of life and the source of the problem as a
society that is not inclusive of people with disability (Hersh 1999 Jordan and
Kaiser 1996) A social model of goal setting validates and necessitates
extensive support from the family teachers and the children themselves as
the lsquoexpertsrsquo Thus the role of the teacher and SLT is to facilitate the dialogue
toward the development of socially appropriate goals For example the SLT
might ask about events that made the child feel lsquoparticularly good and
particularly badrsquo during the current school year (Nelson 1989 176) and use
these critical incidents as a framework for identification of relevant goals
Both impairment and social models can be valid (for an insightful debate see
the Clinical Forum led by Duchan 2001a) A meta-theory that draws on both the
impairment and social models has been developed by the World Health
Organization (WHO 2001) The initial version (WHO 1980) was grounded
in a medical (impairment) model and used the terms impairment disability and
handicap The final version integrated impairment and social models to describe
the health and health-related status of all people and is called The International
Classification of Functioning Disability and Health (ICF) (WHO 2001)
There are two parts to the ICF Table 1 illustrates the interactions between the
parts and components of the ICF Part I is titled lsquoFunctioning and disabilityrsquo and
describes health from the perspectives of the body the individual and society
and includes the components of body structures body functions activities and
participation Body structures refer to the anatomical parts of the body such as
200 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Ta
ble
1A
pp
lica
tio
no
fIC
Fto
asp
ee
cha
nd
lan
gu
ag
ea
sse
ssm
en
tin
ord
er
toin
form
go
al
sett
ing
ICF
pa
rts
ICF
com
po
ne
nts
ICF
de
scri
pto
rsre
lati
ng
toco
mm
un
icati
on
Po
ssib
leco
mp
on
en
tso
fa
nS
LT
ass
ess
me
nt
an
da
na
lysi
sIm
pa
irm
en
t-b
ase
dg
oa
lsS
oci
ally
-ba
sed
go
als
IF
un
ctio
nin
ga
nd
dis
ab
ilit
yB
od
yst
ruct
ure
s
A
na
tom
yo
fn
ose
m
ou
th
ph
ary
nx
la
ryn
x
Ge
ne
tic
ma
teri
al
C
on
du
cta
no
rom
usc
u-
lar
ex
am
ina
tio
na
nd
au
dio
log
ica
la
sse
ss-
me
nt
R
eq
ue
sta
me
dic
al
ex
am
ina
tio
n
S
urg
ica
lre
pa
iro
fcr
an
iofa
cia
la
no
ma
ly
Co
chle
ar
imp
lan
t
P
rom
ote
soci
eta
la
cce
pta
nce
of
div
ers
ity
of
the
ap
pe
ara
nce
of
pe
op
le
En
cou
rag
ed
aily
no
seb
low
ing
tore
du
ceo
ccu
rre
nce
so
fo
titi
sm
ed
ia
Bo
dy
fun
ctio
ns
P
rod
uct
ion
an
dq
ua
lity
of
vo
ice
A
rtic
ula
tio
no
fp
ho
ne
me
s
Ex
pre
ssio
no
fsp
oke
nla
ng
ua
ge
C
on
du
cta
sse
ssm
en
to
fsp
ee
chso
un
ds=
ph
on
olo
gic
alp
roce
sse
sv
oic
ea
nd
lan
gu
ag
e
An
aly
sesp
ee
cha
nd
lan
gu
ag
esa
mp
le
Re
qu
est
an
ed
uca
tio
na
la
sse
ssm
en
to
fre
ad
ing
an
dw
riti
ng
R
ed
uce
au
dib
len
asa
le
mis
sio
nd
uri
ng
the
pro
du
ctio
no
fh
igh
-pre
ssu
reco
nso
na
nts
E
sta
blish
sta
ble
an
da
ccu
rate
pro
du
ctio
ns
thu
sre
du
cin
gth
ev
ari
ab
ilit
yo
fe
rro
rs
In
cre
ase
inte
llig
ibilit
yb
yd
ecr
ea
sin
gth
eu
seo
fp
ho
no
-lo
gic
al
pro
cess
es
con
trib
uti
ng
tou
nin
tellig
ibilit
y(c
fH
od
son
an
dP
ad
en
1
98
1)
R
ed
uce
spe
ech
pa
tte
rns
tha
ta
reu
nu
sua
l(e
g
init
ial
con
son
an
td
ele
tio
n)
or
no
tco
nsi
de
red
tob
elsquon
orm
al
err
ors
rsquo(S
mit
1
99
3)
C
orr
ect
lyp
rod
uce
ph
on
em
es
tha
th
av
ea
hig
hfr
eq
ue
ncy
of
occ
urr
en
ce
Act
ivit
ya
nd
pa
rtic
ipa
tio
n(c
on
sid
er
pe
rfo
rma
nce
ve
rsu
sca
pa
city
)
C
om
mu
nic
ati
ng
wit
hndash
rece
ivin
gndash
spo
ken
me
ssa
ge
s
Sp
ea
kin
g
Co
nv
ers
ati
on
L
ea
rnin
ga
nd
ap
ply
ing
kno
wle
dg
ein
clu
din
gle
arn
ing
tore
ad
an
dw
rite
In
terp
ers
on
al
inte
ract
ion
sa
nd
rela
tio
nsh
ips
C
on
du
ctin
tellig
ibilit
ya
sse
ssm
en
t
Ga
the
rq
ua
lita
tiv
ed
esc
rip
tio
ns
of
succ
ess
es
an
dd
iffi
cul-
tie
sin
pa
rtic
ipa
tio
nin
the
fam
ily
sc
ho
ol
soci
al
situ
ati
on
s
C
orr
ect
lyp
ron
ou
nce
the
child
rsquosn
am
ea
sw
ell
as
the
na
me
so
fsi
gn
ifica
nt
oth
ers
P
ron
ou
nce
wo
rds
the
child
wo
uld
like
tosa
ya
nd=o
rh
as
be
en
tea
sed
ab
ou
t
C
olla
bo
rate
wit
hth
ech
ild
rsquoste
ach
er
top
rom
ote
com
mu
ni-
cati
ve
succ
ess
in
clu
din
gst
rate
gie
sto
rep
air
com
mu
ni-
cati
on
bre
akd
ow
ns
W
ork
wit
ha
child
rsquosp
ee
rso
na
wa
ren
ess
of
com
mu
nic
ati
ve
bre
akd
ow
na
nd
stra
teg
ies
tou
se
eg
a
skin
gfo
rre
pe
titi
on
o
rlsquos
ho
wm
ersquo
(co
nti
nu
ed
)
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 201
Ta
ble
1C
on
tin
ue
d
ICF
pa
rts
ICF
com
po
ne
nts
ICF
de
scri
pto
rsre
lati
ng
toco
mm
un
ica
tio
n
Po
ssib
leco
mp
on
en
tso
fa
nS
LT
ass
ess
me
nt
an
da
na
lysi
sIm
pa
irm
en
t-b
ase
dg
oa
lsS
oci
ally
-ba
sed
go
als
P
resc
ho
ol
ed
uca
tio
n
Co
mm
un
ity
so
cia
la
nd
civ
iclife
P
rom
ote
com
mu
nic
ati
ve
succ
ess
by
ma
inta
inin
ga
dia
ryo
fsi
gn
ifica
nt
ev
en
tsth
at
the
child
ma
yw
an
tto
com
mu
ni-
cate
an
dke
ep
ing
alist
on
the
frid
ge
of
the
child
rsquosp
ron
un
-ci
ati
on
so
fim
po
rta
nt
wo
rds
II
Co
nte
xtu
al
fact
ors
En
vir
on
me
nta
lfa
cto
rs
P
rod
uct
sa
nd
tech
no
log
y
Su
pp
ort
an
dre
lati
on
ship
s
Att
itu
de
s
Se
rvic
es
syst
em
sa
nd
po
lici
es
D
ete
rmin
ep
are
nta
lw
ide
rfa
mily
an
dsc
ho
ol
inv
olv
em
en
ta
nd
sup
po
rt
De
term
ine
att
itu
de
sa
nd
ex
pe
cta
tio
ns
of
the
child
rsquosfa
mily
an
dco
mm
un
ity
reg
ard
ing
soci
al
occ
up
ati
on
al
an
de
du
cati
on
al
asp
ira
tio
ns
D
ete
rmin
eg
ov
ern
me
nta
lp
olici
es
reg
ard
ing
the
nu
mb
er
of
fun
de
din
ter-
ve
nti
on
sess
ion
se
tc
mdashmdash
Pe
rso
na
lfa
cto
rsA
ttri
bu
tes
of
the
pe
rso
n
an
dth
ein
tern
al
infl
ue
nce
so
nfu
nct
ion
ing
an
dd
isa
bilit
y
D
iscu
ssth
ein
flu
en
ceo
fa
ge
of
child
se
lf-
con
fid
en
ce
mo
tiv
ati
on
att
en
tio
n
cog
nit
ive
ab
ilit
y
be
lie
fs
lea
rnin
gst
yle
a
nd
ex
pe
rie
nce
wit
hco
mm
un
ica
tio
nfa
ilu
re
mdashmdash
202 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
the nose mouth pharynx and larynx Body functions describes lsquothe physiolo-
gical functions of body systemsrsquo (WHO 2001 10) Included in the category of
body functions are lsquovoice functionsrsquo such as production and quality of voice
lsquospeech functionsrsquo including the articulation of phonemes and lsquomental func-
tions of languagersquo including expression of spoken language Activity is lsquothe
execution of a task by an individualrsquo (WHO 2001 10) and participation
describes the involvement in a life situation Thus under the heading of activity
and participation communication in its many forms is included as an entire
chapter within the ICF (chapter 3) Some of the highlighted aspects of
communication include lsquoCommunicating with ndash receiving ndash spoken messagesrsquo
lsquospeakingrsquo and lsquoconversationrsquo Other relevant categories of activity and
participation include learning and applying knowledge (chapter 1) such as
lsquolearning to readrsquo and lsquolearning to writersquo Additionally activities and participa-
tion include interpersonal interactions and relationships (chapter 7) major life
areas such as preschool education (chapter 8) and community social and civic
life (chapter 9) Finally the term disability lsquoserves as an umbrella term for
impairments activity limitation and participation restrictionsrsquo (WHO 2001 3)
Part 2 of the ICF is titled lsquoContextual factorsrsquo and includes environmental and
personal factors (see Table 1) Environmental factors lsquomake up the physical
social and attitudinal environment in which people live and conduct their livesrsquo
(WHO 2001 10) and can be facilitators or barriers Environmental factors
relevant to communication include products and technology (chapter 1) support
and relationships (chapter 3) attitudes (chapter 4) services systems and policies
(chapter 5) Personal factors include the attributes of the person and the internal
influences on functioning and disability Due to the individuality of this WHO
component personal factors are not specified as chapters within the ICF
Within the field of communication disorders there has been some use of the
ICF (and its predecessors) as a meta-theory for practice (for example American
Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Threats 2000 2001 Worrall
1999 2001) The application of the ICF (and its predecessors) has particularly
occurred within the context of SLTs working with adults who have dementia
experienced a stroke or acquired brain injury (for example Bourgeois 1998
Hersh 1999 Worrall 1999) with adults who have voice disorders (Ma and Yiu
2001a 2001b) including those who use alaryngeal speech (Eadie 2003) There
have also been some descriptions of the use of a social model of interaction in
speech and language practice with children (for example Duchan 2001a 2001b
Kovarsky 2001 Locke 2000) but limited direct application of the ICF to the
consideration of the speech of children The exception is the excellent work by
Hodge (1983) who applied the original 1980 version of the WHO model to
assessment and intervention practices with a child who had a speech impairment
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 203
In order to explore the application of the ICF to child language teaching and
therapy each of the parts and components of the ICF will be discussed with
relation to childrenrsquos speech production Table 1 lists each of the parts and
components of the ICF and their application to a speech and language assess-
ment in order to inform goal setting Many of these assessments and analyses are
typically included in traditional SLT assessments (see the forum led by Williams
2002) For example oromuscular examinations and audiological assessments are
conducted to assess body structures An SLT assessment of speech sounds and
phonology are conducted to assess body functions However it is less likely that
SLTs consider activity and participation contextual and personal factors
Conversely teachers frequently consider activity and participation of children
Possible methods of evaluating activity and participation include an intelligibility
assessment or by gathering qualitative descriptions of successes and difficulties
in participation in the family school and social situations Determination of
parental wider family and school involvement support attitudes and expecta-
tions comprises evaluation of contextual factors Personal factors can include the
age of the child self-confidence motivation attention cognitive ability beliefs
learning style and experience with communication failure on intervention
Although there is close interrelationship between each of these areas goals
will be suggested for parts and components
Goals targeting functioning and disability
Body structures and functions
Children who are described as having a communication impairment of
(known) origin usually have impaired body structure(s) Impairment of body
structures can include a cleft palate anklyglossia or a malformed cochlea
among other examples Impairment-based goal setting for children with
impaired body structures often includes medical intervention such as surgical
repair of a cleft or a cochlear implant With the advancement of medical
science there is the potential for a decreasing need for extensive speech
intervention for people with impairment of body structures For example
Golding-Kushner (1995 327) has written that lsquoApproximately 80 of
children born with nonsyndromic cleft palate who undergo palate repair by
18 months of age develop speech free from compensatory errors without any
type of therapeutic interventionrsquo A social goal addressing impairment of body
structures could aim to promote societal acceptance of diversity of the
appearance of people For example a popular television show could include
a child who has a craniofacial anomaly in order to promote inclusiveness
204 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Impaired body structure can result in impaired body function For example
a person with a cleft palate may have nasal emission during speech An
impairment-based speech goal could therefore include reduction of audible
nasal emission during the production of high-pressure consonants (stops
fricatives and affricates) (Harding and Grunwell 1998) This may have the
social advantage of being more intelligible and less different or obtrusive
Other more subtle impairments in body structure and function that
influence speech production can be detected via oromusculature examination
(for example Ozanne 1992 Robbins and Klee 1987) with examples of
impaired body structure including tongue-tie and examples of body function
impairment include difficulty on diadochokinesis (rapid speech movement)
tasks Debate exists as to the impact on speech production as a result of these
more subtle impairments of body structure and function Similarly strong
debate surrounds the use of oral-motor exercises to facilitate speech sound
acquisition in children with speech impairment Lof (2003 9) provides a
summary of this debate and concludes the lsquothere is little if any theoretical
philosophical or clinical justification for using oral motor exercises to improve
speech sound production skillsrsquo
Impairments of body structure and function relating to hearing can be
detected via audiological examination such as tympanometry An example of
impairment of body structure is otitis media (glue ear) while an example of
body function impairment is hearing loss Controversy surrounds the inter-
relationship between otitis media (impaired body structure) and speech
perception=production (body function) Shriberg et al (2000a 2000b) has
altered the debate about whether or not otitis media is the cause of speech
impairment to the notion that there is increased risk of speech impairment as a
result of occurrences of otitis media However Campbell et al (2003 353)
found that lsquopersistent otitis media in the first three years of life did not
significantly increase the risk of speech delay after controlling for relevant
covariatesrsquo A social intervention relating to aural body structure and function
differences is the Healthy Little Ears project a health promotion project with
children in Australia (Mid Western Area Health Service 1999) Within this
programme children are encouraged to blow their nose each day to increase
functioning of the eustachian tube and decrease the occurrence of otitis
media
Genetics research has opened new areas of knowledge of impairment at the
micro level of body structure It may be the case that genetic abnormality may
account for children exhibiting impaired body function but previously thought
of as having intact body structures For example Lai et al (2001) described the
FOXP2 gene chromosome 7 as relating to speech apraxia Flipsen et al (2001)
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 205
have described acoustic markers that are indicative for genetic studies of
speech impairment The influence of these genetic breakthroughs on goal
setting in speech intervention may include discussion of familial histories
(for example Lewis et al 1989 Lewis and Freebairn 1993) and genetic
counselling Early intervention opportunities may be made for younger family
members of the child referred for speech intervention Early identification
can also lead to intervention opportunities to support academic success
particularly with respect to reading and spelling (Lewis et al 2000)
To date the majority of children who are seen by SLTs have communication
impairments of unknown origin (Shriberg et al 1986) indicating that their
body structure is considered to be intact These children have difficulty with
body functions such as the production of speech sounds Traditional SLT
measures of the speech function of these children have included the array of
articulation=phonology tests such as the Edinburgh Articulation Test (Anthony
et al 1971) and the Computerized Articulation and Phonology Evaluation
System (CAPES) (Masterson and Bernhardt 2002) The range of speech
analyses includes phonological analyses [for example Profile of Phonology
(PROPHthorn ) Long et al 2002] nonlinear analyses (Bernhardt and Stemberger
2000) and psycholinguistic analyses (Stackhouse and Wells 1993) Addition-
ally objective measures including acoustic (for example spectrographic) and
physiological (for example electropalatographic Gibbon 1999) tools are
enabling more accurate description of speech (Ball et al 2001) Children
with speech impairments may receive assessment reports concluding with
impairment-based goals such as to increase the percentage of consonants
correct (PCC) decrease the occurrence of various phonological processes or to
produce a list of phonemes expected but not produced correctly by the child
For children with impaired speech function there has been extensive debate
among SLTs regarding appropriate intervention goals Two dichotomous
approaches to goal selection have been proposed First the most knowledge
method (also called the traditional or developmental approach) and second the
least knowledge method (nontraditional nondevelopmental approach) (Bleile
1995) For the most knowledge method intervention goals differ minimally
from the sounds the child already produces (Elbert and Gierut 1986) That is
sounds or phonological processes are selected as intervention goals because
they are earlier developing stimulable and produced correctly in particular
contextual environments (Bernthal and Bankson 1998) In contrast in the least
knowledge method lsquo treatment targets differ from the childrsquos existing abilities
by multiple featuresrsquo (Elbert and Gierut 1986) Therefore sounds or processes
are selected because they are nonstimulable phonetically more complex have
phonologically marked properties reflect least phonological knowledge as
206 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
categorized by inventory constraints (with respect to phonemes) and are later
acquired (Gierut et al 1996) Gierut (1998) provides evidence that treatment
goals are achieved efficiently if children are taught sounds or sound pairs that
are not in a childrsquos pretreatment repertoire and developmentally later-acquired
sounds that are phonetically more complex acoustically undifferentiated and
nonstimulable that is following the least knowledge approach In contrast
Rvachew and Nowak (2001) compared the most knowledge (traditional) and
least knowledge (nontraditional) approaches for 48 children with moderate to
severe phonological disorders The study had four major findings children
made more progress toward acquiring target sounds through a traditional
approach the approaches did not differ in generalization from treated to
untreated sounds children liked both approaches parents were more favourable
to the traditional approach These authors have debated their different inter-
pretations of the outcomes of selecting the traditional and nontraditional
approaches in Morrisette and Gierut (2003) and Rvachew and Nowak (2003)
However Williams (2003) adds another dimension to this debate in her helpful
overview and discussion of five approaches to target selection As well as
the traditional and nontraditional approaches she includes markedness the
systemic function of sounds within a given sound system contrastive sounds
and lexical properties of treatment words She concludes by advocating more
research that addresses the impact of additive relationships between these
different approaches
Some questions following on from these approaches to impairment-based
goal selection by SLTs include the following Should treatment goals include
sounds for which the child is not stimulable (Powell 2003) Do children learn
sounds that are stimulable without having to be taught (Elbert and Gierut
1986 Powell and Miccio 1996) Should treatment goals target later-acquired
sounds Does teaching later-acquired sounds facilitate linguistic generaliza-
tion more readily than teaching earlier-acquired ones (Gierut 1998 Rvachew
and Nowak 2001) Although these questions need to be asked it is not
possible to predict with certainty what the most appropriate goal is for an
individual child In order to appropriately answer questions such as these
SLTs need to add to their impairment-based approach focusing on body
structures and functions The ICF provides additional areas of consideration to
enable appropriate goal setting for each individual
Activities and participation
The ICF model specifies consideration of activities and participation in
facilitating health and well-being Some that have relevance to children with
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 207
speech impairment include speaking conversation learning and applying
knowledge interpersonal interactions and relationships community social
and civic life Each of these will be addressed with relation to children with
speech impairment
Within the last decade SLTs have appropriated measures of activity and
participation that consider (to some extent) the social impact of speaking and
conversation One measure of activity that has been formalized as an assess-
ment practice is the level of intelligibility (Bleile 1995 Kent et al 1994
Kwiatkowski and Shriberg 1992) The Childrenrsquos Speech Intelligibility
Measure (Wilcox and Morris 1999) is one commercially available sampling
tool to quantify the extent of intelligibility of individual childrenrsquos speech by
untrained listeners There are few examples of ways in which SLTs consider
participation within speaking and conversation by children with speech
impairment One example is the Therapy Outcomes Measure (Enderby and
John 1997) which includes a specific subsection on childrenrsquos speech
Consideration of activities and participation also includes the influence of
the impairment on learning and applying knowledge With the high co-
occurrence of children with speech impairments having reading and spelling
difficulties (Larrivee and Catts 1999) it is essential that goals are developed
around the facilitation of academic skills (Hodson 1994) Intervention
targeting phonological awareness should accompany speech intervention
(Gillon 2000) Partnerships between teachers and SLTs are essential for
appropriate goal setting to facilitate successful oral and literate communicative
skills throughout the lives of these children
Further SLTs and teachers can consider interpersonal interactions and
relationships in their intervention planning for children with speech impair-
ment Pertinent social assessment practices may consist of a discussion with
the child his=her parents siblings friends grandparents and other significant
people to ascertain social goals and barriers interests and hopes (Duchan
2001a) Pretty (1995) suggested a number of goals congruent with a social
model for a four-year old girl with severe speech impairment The goals
focused on the interpersonal interactions and relationships with her family
teacher friends peers and peersrsquo parents For example the teacher and SLT
collaborated to promote communicative success at preschool including
strategies to repair communication breakdowns encouraging a group of her
peers to ask for repetition when they did not understand BJ or to ask BJ to
lsquoshow mersquo BJrsquos family were encouraged to look at her when she spoke to them
use all available cues (for example maintaining a diary of significant events
that she may want to communicate) and keep a list of BJrsquos pronunciations of
important words (for example the name of her best friend) These goals based
208 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
on activity and participation can readily be adapted for any child with a speech
impairment
Finally consideration of community social and civic life of children with
speech impairment is rarely discussed However there is scope for socially
based intervention goals to facilitate activity and participation in this context
Friends can be encouraged to spend time talking and babbling with a baby
who has a craniofacial anomaly in order to develop social interactions despite
the fact that the child may look different and have reduced time for social
interaction due to the extensive amount of time spent feeding Another
example of a social goal for people with a hearing impairment would consist
of public education to decrease background noise and to encourage people to
look at a person with a hearing impairment while talking with them
When considering activity and participation the ICF allows for comparison
between performance and capacity There may be a mismatch between a
childrsquos performance within their daily lives and their communicative capacity
on standardized speech assessment tools At times children are more capable
within the confines of a standardized assessment than they demonstrate within
the complex communicative demands of the classroom At other times
children exhibit a variety of compensatory strategies to minimize commu-
nicative difficulty that is evident on standardized assessment tasks Considera-
tion of performance and capacity is an important component within the
capability focus model described by Kwiatkowski and Shriberg (1993
1998) who have successfully tested this with hundreds of children who
have received speech intervention Even while undertaking standardized
assessment tools there may be a mismatch between performance on one
versus another demonstrating the mismatch between performance and capa-
city Some areas of difference include single word versus connected speech
(McLeod et al 1994 Morrison and Shriberg 1992) imitated versus sponta-
neous speech (Leonard et al 1978) stimulable versus nonstimulable sounds
(Powell and Miccio 1996) monosyllabic versus polysyllabic words (James et
al 2002) The difference between a childrsquos communicative performance and
capacity should be considered when developing appropriate goals
Contextual factors
Environmental factors
Some of the environmental factors mentioned by WHO that relate to children
with speech impairment include products and technology support and
relationships attitudes and services systems and policies
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 209
There is a burgeoning industry of products and technology utilizing speech-
activated devices for tasks such as computer operation word processing home
banking navigation and telephone directory assistance Intelligible speech is
essential for the use of speech-activated devices and can place restrictions on
the lives of adults who have residual speech impairments (Griffin et al 2001)
While children with speech impairment currently are not affected by this
technology if intelligible speech is not achieved by adulthood incorporation
within future society may be limited Further with the advances of technology
it is possible that speech-activated devices may be a common part of living for
children and adults alike
Probably the most important environmental factor relating to children with
speech impairment is support and relationships The incorporation of parental
support into the intervention practices is frequently a key to success (see
Bowen this issue) There is some research suggesting links between inter-
vention outcomes and environmental factors such as socioeconomic status
maternal IQ and maternal educational level (Chan et al 1998) Wider
networks of family friends and teachers are also important environmental
influences
Societal attitudes towards children adolescents and adults with speech
impairments are frequently negative (Crowe Hall 1991 Madison 1992
Silverman and Falk 1992) For example Silverman and Paulus (1989)
compared childrenrsquos attitudes towards a child who uses=w=for=r=with a typical
speaker The child with the mild speech impairment was considered to be less
talkative and hear less well than his=her peers dysfluent unpleasant to listen
to soft boring dull more tense nervous afraid handicapped isolated
uncomfortable Further Anderson and Antonak (1992) found that social
acceptance of an actor with a mild speech sound impairment was less
positive than the same actor demonstrating a physical disability Research
by Felsenfeld et al (1992) adds another dimension people with speech
impairment were found to be less extroverted and socialized with fewer
people than people with typical speech development Clearly people with
speech impairment may be compromised by societal attitudes necessitating
goals directed towards society as well as working at the impairment level
The services systems and policies relating to individual children are as
varied as each individual and can influence the type of schooling the child
receives the type and amount of support the child receives at school whether
a child is eligible for SLT intervention and so forth Political factors can affect
the actuality of intervention for individual clients For example in some health
sectors within the USA the politicization of health care dictates the number of
SLT sessions a person with a particular impairment can receive Philosophical
210 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
attitudes toward the labelling of a child with a speech or language impairment
can influence the type of goals developed for a child (Christensen and Baker
2002 Green and Kostogriz 2002) For example McDermott (1993 272) has
argued that lsquothere is no such thing as LD [Learning Disability] only a social
practice of displaying noticing documenting remediating and explaining itrsquo
McLeod (2003) described the distinction between the use of the terms
lsquonormalrsquo and lsquotypicalrsquo and SLTsrsquo role in the categorization of children along
the normalndashabnormal divide Simmons-Mackie (2001) described differing
clinical assumptions leading to differing intervention approaches A childrsquos
experiences of receiving intervention from different people with differing
clinical assumptions is documented by Kovarsky (2001) Thus services
systems and policies can play a role in goal setting for children with speech
impairment
Personal factors
Attached to every lsquospeech impairmentrsquo is a real child (Bleile 1991) His or her
unique makeup must be considered within his=her cultural milieu in order to
determine the most appropriate intervention goals The ICF (WHO 2001 8)
recognizes the lsquolarge social and cultural variancersquo including gender age other
health conditions coping style social background education profession past
experience and character style Currently research into typically developing
children has demonstrated the wide range of individual differences (for
example McLeod et al 2001) For children with speech impairment there
are some case studies documenting the effect of personal factors on appro-
priate goal setting and intervention outcomes For example Kamhi (2000)
describes the progress of phonological intervention with his daughter Franne
Frannersquos lsquostubbornnessrsquo and desire to communicate with her parents led to
delineation between speech sound practice with her SLT and meaningful
communication with her parents He writes lsquoFrannersquos reluctance to practise
speech sounds was her way to let us know that we should focus on what
she said when she spoke rather than on how she said itrsquo (Kamhi 2000 183)
One important and documented factor to consider in the selection of speech
goals is the childrsquos personal ability to evaluate his=her speech Self-evaluation
occurs when the child judges the accuracy of his=her response prior to explicit
feedback from the clinician (cf Koegel et al 1986) lsquoSelf-evaluation appears
to be a central concept within diverse theoretical views of normal speech
development and within approaches to and explications of successful
interventionrsquo (Shriberg and Kwiatkowski 1987 154) Thus SLTs can incor-
porate self-evaluation within the intervention goals
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 211
Conclusion What goals are appropriate
It can be argued that the ultimate goal of speech intervention is to bring about
correct production of speech sounds resulting in intelligible conversational
speech within a childrsquos milieu (cf Kamhi 2000 Powell 1991) However
other similarly important goals may be to enhance a childrsquos participation in
social interaction to increase self-esteem or to decrease negative societal
attitudes towards people with speech impairment The ICF is a meta-theory
that allows for consideration of all these possibilities and is enhanced by
collaboration between SLTs and teachers A summary of possible goals
relating to the ICF is provided in Table 1 The most important outcome of
the present discussion is to reiterate that every child is unique requiring a
different approach to best meet their needs (Lowe 1994) Thus it is important
to consider all the factors before making a decision then to devise goals in
consultation and monitor progress (see Baker and McLeod this issue)
Continual revision and consultation will result in appropriate outcomes for
individual children as well as society
References
American Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Scope of practice in
speech-language pathology Rockville MD ASHA
Anderson R J and Antonak R F 1992 The influence of attitudes and
contact on reactions to persons with physical and speech disabilities
Rehabilitation Counselling Bulletin 35 240ndash47
Anthony A Bogle D Ingram T T S and McIsaac M W 1971 The
Edinburgh articulation test Edinburgh E and S Livingstone
Baker E and McLeod S 2004 Evidence-based management of children with
phonological impairment of unknown origin Child Language Teaching
and Therapy 20 261ndash85
Ball M J Gracco V and Stone M 2001 A comparison of imaging
techniques for the investigation of normal and disordered speech produc-
tion Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 313ndash24
Bernhardt B H and Stemberger J P 2000 Workbook in nonlinear phonology
for clinical application Austin TX ProEd
Bernthal J E and Bankson N W 1998 Articulation and phonological
disorders 4th edition Boston Allyn and Bacon
Bleile K M 1991 Individual differences In Bleile K M editor Child
phonology a book of exercises for students San Diego CA Singular 57ndash71
212 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Bleile K M 1995 Manual of articulation and phonological disorders San
Diego CA Singular
Bourgeois M S 1998 Functional outcome assessment of adults with
dementia Seminars in Speech and Hearing 19 261ndash75
Bowen C 2004 Child Language Teaching and Therapy 20 245ndash60
Campbell T F Dollaghan C A Rockette H E Paradise J L Feldman H
M Shriberg L D Sabo D L and Kurs-Lasky M 2003 Risk factors
for speech delay of unknown origin in 3-year-old children Child
Development 74 346ndash57
Chan A McAllister L and Wilson L 1998 An investigation of the agendash
MLU relationship and factors which predict MLU in two and three year
old Australian children Asia Pacific Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing 3 97ndash108
Christensen C A and Baker C D 2002 Pedagogy observation and
the construction of learning disability Pedagogy Culture and Society
10 73ndash93
Crowe Hall B J 1991 Attitudes of fourth and sixth graders toward peers with
mild articulation disorders Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 22 334ndash40
Duchan J F 2001a Impairment and social views of speech-language
pathology clinical practices re-examined Advances in Speech-Language
Pathology 3 37ndash46
Duchan J F 2001b Social and impairment approaches viewed in a forest and
in the shadows of a city street Advances in Speech-Language Pathology
3 73ndash79
Eadie T L 2003 The ICF A proposed framework for comprehensive
rehabilitation of individuals who use alaryngeal speech American
Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 12 189ndash97
Elbert M and Gierut J A 1986 Handbook of clinical phonology
approaches to assessment and treatment London Taylor amp Francis
Enderby P and John A 1997 Therapy outcome measures speech-language
pathology technical manual London Singular
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1992 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder linguistic
and personality results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35
1114ndash25
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1994 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder educational
and occupational results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37
1341ndash53
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 213
Flipsen P Shriberg L D Weismer G Karlsson H B and McSweeny J L
2001 Acoustic phenotypes for speech-genetics studies reference data for
residual =3= distortions Clinical Linguistics and Phonetics 15 603ndash30
Gibbon F E 1999 Undifferentiated lingual gestures in children with
articulation=phonological disorders Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing Research 42 382ndash97
Gierut J A 1998 Treatment efficacy functional phonological disorders in
children Journal of Speech Language Hearing Research 41 S85ndash100
Gierut J A Morrisette M L Hughes M T and Rowland S 1996
Phonological treatment efficacy and developmental norms Language
Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 27 215ndash30
Gillon G T 2000 The efficacy of phonological awareness intervention for
children with spoken language impairment Language Speech and Hear-
ing Services in Schools 31 126ndash41
Goldman R and Fristoe M 1986 Goldman Fristoe Test of Articulation
Revised Circle Pines MN American Guidance Service
Green B and Kostogriz A 2002 Learning difficulties and the new literacy
studies a socially critical perspective In Soler J Wearmouth J and
Reid G editors Contextualising difficulties in literacy development
exploring politics culture ethnicity and ethics Milton Keynes The Open
University
Griffin S Wilson L Clark L and McLeod S 2001 Speech pathology
applications of automatic speech recognition technology In Wilson L
and Hewat S editors Proceedings of the 2001 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
293ndash99
Golding-Kushner K 1995 Treatment of articulation and resonance disorders
associated with cleft palate and VPI In Shprintzen R and Bardach J
editors Cleft palate speech management a multidisciplinary approach
St Louis Mosby 327ndash63
Harasty J and Reed V A 1994 The prevalence of speech and language
impairment in two Sydney metropolitan schools Australian Journal of
Human Communication Disorders 22 1ndash23
Harding A and Grunwell P 1998 Active versus passive cleft-type speech
characteristics International Journal of Language and Communication
Disorders 33 329ndash52
Hersh D 1999 Impairment to empowerment social model theory and
aphasia therapy In McLeod S and McAllister L editors Proceedings
of the 1999 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 125ndash30
214 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Hodge M 1983 Assessment and treatment of a child with a developmental
speech disorder a biological behavioural perspective Seminars in Speech
and Language 14 128ndash41
Hodson B W 1994 Helping individuals become intelligible literate and
articulate the role of phonology Topics in Language Disorders 14 1ndash16
Hodson B W and Paden E P 1981 Phonological processes which
characterize unintelligible and intelligible speech in early childhood
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 46 369ndash73
James D van Doorn J and McLeod S 2002 Segment production in mono-
di- and polysyllabic words in children aged 3ndash7 years In Windsor F
Kelly L and Hewlett N editors Themes in Clinical Phonetics and
Linguistics Hillsdale NJ Lawrence Erlbaum 287ndash98
Jordan L and Kaiser W 1996 Aphasia a social approach London
Chapman and Hall
Kamhi A G 2000 Practice makes perfect the incompatibility of practicing
speech and meaningful communication Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 31 182ndash85
Kent R D Miolo G and Bloedel S 1994 The intelligibility of childrenrsquos
speech a review of evaluation procedures American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 3 81ndash95
Koegel L K Koegel R L and Costello-Ingham J 1986 Programming
rapid generalization of correct articulation through self-monitoring proce-
dures Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 24ndash32
Kovarsky D 2001 Ruminating on impairments-based assessment and inter-
vention Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 59ndash62
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1992 Intelligibility assessment in
developmental phonological disorders accuracy of caregiver gloss
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35 1095ndash1104
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1993 Speech normalization in develop-
mental phonological disorders a retrospective study of capability-focus
theory Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 24 10ndash18
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1998 The capability-focus treatment
framework for child speech disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 7 27ndash38
Lai C S L Fisher S E Hurst J A Vargha-Khadem F and Monaco A P
2001 A forkhead-domain gene is mutated in severe speech and language
disorder Nature 413 519ndash23
Larrivee L S and Catts H W 1999 Early reading achievement in children
with expressive phonological disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 8 118ndash28
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 215
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
Ta
ble
1A
pp
lica
tio
no
fIC
Fto
asp
ee
cha
nd
lan
gu
ag
ea
sse
ssm
en
tin
ord
er
toin
form
go
al
sett
ing
ICF
pa
rts
ICF
com
po
ne
nts
ICF
de
scri
pto
rsre
lati
ng
toco
mm
un
icati
on
Po
ssib
leco
mp
on
en
tso
fa
nS
LT
ass
ess
me
nt
an
da
na
lysi
sIm
pa
irm
en
t-b
ase
dg
oa
lsS
oci
ally
-ba
sed
go
als
IF
un
ctio
nin
ga
nd
dis
ab
ilit
yB
od
yst
ruct
ure
s
A
na
tom
yo
fn
ose
m
ou
th
ph
ary
nx
la
ryn
x
Ge
ne
tic
ma
teri
al
C
on
du
cta
no
rom
usc
u-
lar
ex
am
ina
tio
na
nd
au
dio
log
ica
la
sse
ss-
me
nt
R
eq
ue
sta
me
dic
al
ex
am
ina
tio
n
S
urg
ica
lre
pa
iro
fcr
an
iofa
cia
la
no
ma
ly
Co
chle
ar
imp
lan
t
P
rom
ote
soci
eta
la
cce
pta
nce
of
div
ers
ity
of
the
ap
pe
ara
nce
of
pe
op
le
En
cou
rag
ed
aily
no
seb
low
ing
tore
du
ceo
ccu
rre
nce
so
fo
titi
sm
ed
ia
Bo
dy
fun
ctio
ns
P
rod
uct
ion
an
dq
ua
lity
of
vo
ice
A
rtic
ula
tio
no
fp
ho
ne
me
s
Ex
pre
ssio
no
fsp
oke
nla
ng
ua
ge
C
on
du
cta
sse
ssm
en
to
fsp
ee
chso
un
ds=
ph
on
olo
gic
alp
roce
sse
sv
oic
ea
nd
lan
gu
ag
e
An
aly
sesp
ee
cha
nd
lan
gu
ag
esa
mp
le
Re
qu
est
an
ed
uca
tio
na
la
sse
ssm
en
to
fre
ad
ing
an
dw
riti
ng
R
ed
uce
au
dib
len
asa
le
mis
sio
nd
uri
ng
the
pro
du
ctio
no
fh
igh
-pre
ssu
reco
nso
na
nts
E
sta
blish
sta
ble
an
da
ccu
rate
pro
du
ctio
ns
thu
sre
du
cin
gth
ev
ari
ab
ilit
yo
fe
rro
rs
In
cre
ase
inte
llig
ibilit
yb
yd
ecr
ea
sin
gth
eu
seo
fp
ho
no
-lo
gic
al
pro
cess
es
con
trib
uti
ng
tou
nin
tellig
ibilit
y(c
fH
od
son
an
dP
ad
en
1
98
1)
R
ed
uce
spe
ech
pa
tte
rns
tha
ta
reu
nu
sua
l(e
g
init
ial
con
son
an
td
ele
tio
n)
or
no
tco
nsi
de
red
tob
elsquon
orm
al
err
ors
rsquo(S
mit
1
99
3)
C
orr
ect
lyp
rod
uce
ph
on
em
es
tha
th
av
ea
hig
hfr
eq
ue
ncy
of
occ
urr
en
ce
Act
ivit
ya
nd
pa
rtic
ipa
tio
n(c
on
sid
er
pe
rfo
rma
nce
ve
rsu
sca
pa
city
)
C
om
mu
nic
ati
ng
wit
hndash
rece
ivin
gndash
spo
ken
me
ssa
ge
s
Sp
ea
kin
g
Co
nv
ers
ati
on
L
ea
rnin
ga
nd
ap
ply
ing
kno
wle
dg
ein
clu
din
gle
arn
ing
tore
ad
an
dw
rite
In
terp
ers
on
al
inte
ract
ion
sa
nd
rela
tio
nsh
ips
C
on
du
ctin
tellig
ibilit
ya
sse
ssm
en
t
Ga
the
rq
ua
lita
tiv
ed
esc
rip
tio
ns
of
succ
ess
es
an
dd
iffi
cul-
tie
sin
pa
rtic
ipa
tio
nin
the
fam
ily
sc
ho
ol
soci
al
situ
ati
on
s
C
orr
ect
lyp
ron
ou
nce
the
child
rsquosn
am
ea
sw
ell
as
the
na
me
so
fsi
gn
ifica
nt
oth
ers
P
ron
ou
nce
wo
rds
the
child
wo
uld
like
tosa
ya
nd=o
rh
as
be
en
tea
sed
ab
ou
t
C
olla
bo
rate
wit
hth
ech
ild
rsquoste
ach
er
top
rom
ote
com
mu
ni-
cati
ve
succ
ess
in
clu
din
gst
rate
gie
sto
rep
air
com
mu
ni-
cati
on
bre
akd
ow
ns
W
ork
wit
ha
child
rsquosp
ee
rso
na
wa
ren
ess
of
com
mu
nic
ati
ve
bre
akd
ow
na
nd
stra
teg
ies
tou
se
eg
a
skin
gfo
rre
pe
titi
on
o
rlsquos
ho
wm
ersquo
(co
nti
nu
ed
)
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 201
Ta
ble
1C
on
tin
ue
d
ICF
pa
rts
ICF
com
po
ne
nts
ICF
de
scri
pto
rsre
lati
ng
toco
mm
un
ica
tio
n
Po
ssib
leco
mp
on
en
tso
fa
nS
LT
ass
ess
me
nt
an
da
na
lysi
sIm
pa
irm
en
t-b
ase
dg
oa
lsS
oci
ally
-ba
sed
go
als
P
resc
ho
ol
ed
uca
tio
n
Co
mm
un
ity
so
cia
la
nd
civ
iclife
P
rom
ote
com
mu
nic
ati
ve
succ
ess
by
ma
inta
inin
ga
dia
ryo
fsi
gn
ifica
nt
ev
en
tsth
at
the
child
ma
yw
an
tto
com
mu
ni-
cate
an
dke
ep
ing
alist
on
the
frid
ge
of
the
child
rsquosp
ron
un
-ci
ati
on
so
fim
po
rta
nt
wo
rds
II
Co
nte
xtu
al
fact
ors
En
vir
on
me
nta
lfa
cto
rs
P
rod
uct
sa
nd
tech
no
log
y
Su
pp
ort
an
dre
lati
on
ship
s
Att
itu
de
s
Se
rvic
es
syst
em
sa
nd
po
lici
es
D
ete
rmin
ep
are
nta
lw
ide
rfa
mily
an
dsc
ho
ol
inv
olv
em
en
ta
nd
sup
po
rt
De
term
ine
att
itu
de
sa
nd
ex
pe
cta
tio
ns
of
the
child
rsquosfa
mily
an
dco
mm
un
ity
reg
ard
ing
soci
al
occ
up
ati
on
al
an
de
du
cati
on
al
asp
ira
tio
ns
D
ete
rmin
eg
ov
ern
me
nta
lp
olici
es
reg
ard
ing
the
nu
mb
er
of
fun
de
din
ter-
ve
nti
on
sess
ion
se
tc
mdashmdash
Pe
rso
na
lfa
cto
rsA
ttri
bu
tes
of
the
pe
rso
n
an
dth
ein
tern
al
infl
ue
nce
so
nfu
nct
ion
ing
an
dd
isa
bilit
y
D
iscu
ssth
ein
flu
en
ceo
fa
ge
of
child
se
lf-
con
fid
en
ce
mo
tiv
ati
on
att
en
tio
n
cog
nit
ive
ab
ilit
y
be
lie
fs
lea
rnin
gst
yle
a
nd
ex
pe
rie
nce
wit
hco
mm
un
ica
tio
nfa
ilu
re
mdashmdash
202 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
the nose mouth pharynx and larynx Body functions describes lsquothe physiolo-
gical functions of body systemsrsquo (WHO 2001 10) Included in the category of
body functions are lsquovoice functionsrsquo such as production and quality of voice
lsquospeech functionsrsquo including the articulation of phonemes and lsquomental func-
tions of languagersquo including expression of spoken language Activity is lsquothe
execution of a task by an individualrsquo (WHO 2001 10) and participation
describes the involvement in a life situation Thus under the heading of activity
and participation communication in its many forms is included as an entire
chapter within the ICF (chapter 3) Some of the highlighted aspects of
communication include lsquoCommunicating with ndash receiving ndash spoken messagesrsquo
lsquospeakingrsquo and lsquoconversationrsquo Other relevant categories of activity and
participation include learning and applying knowledge (chapter 1) such as
lsquolearning to readrsquo and lsquolearning to writersquo Additionally activities and participa-
tion include interpersonal interactions and relationships (chapter 7) major life
areas such as preschool education (chapter 8) and community social and civic
life (chapter 9) Finally the term disability lsquoserves as an umbrella term for
impairments activity limitation and participation restrictionsrsquo (WHO 2001 3)
Part 2 of the ICF is titled lsquoContextual factorsrsquo and includes environmental and
personal factors (see Table 1) Environmental factors lsquomake up the physical
social and attitudinal environment in which people live and conduct their livesrsquo
(WHO 2001 10) and can be facilitators or barriers Environmental factors
relevant to communication include products and technology (chapter 1) support
and relationships (chapter 3) attitudes (chapter 4) services systems and policies
(chapter 5) Personal factors include the attributes of the person and the internal
influences on functioning and disability Due to the individuality of this WHO
component personal factors are not specified as chapters within the ICF
Within the field of communication disorders there has been some use of the
ICF (and its predecessors) as a meta-theory for practice (for example American
Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Threats 2000 2001 Worrall
1999 2001) The application of the ICF (and its predecessors) has particularly
occurred within the context of SLTs working with adults who have dementia
experienced a stroke or acquired brain injury (for example Bourgeois 1998
Hersh 1999 Worrall 1999) with adults who have voice disorders (Ma and Yiu
2001a 2001b) including those who use alaryngeal speech (Eadie 2003) There
have also been some descriptions of the use of a social model of interaction in
speech and language practice with children (for example Duchan 2001a 2001b
Kovarsky 2001 Locke 2000) but limited direct application of the ICF to the
consideration of the speech of children The exception is the excellent work by
Hodge (1983) who applied the original 1980 version of the WHO model to
assessment and intervention practices with a child who had a speech impairment
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 203
In order to explore the application of the ICF to child language teaching and
therapy each of the parts and components of the ICF will be discussed with
relation to childrenrsquos speech production Table 1 lists each of the parts and
components of the ICF and their application to a speech and language assess-
ment in order to inform goal setting Many of these assessments and analyses are
typically included in traditional SLT assessments (see the forum led by Williams
2002) For example oromuscular examinations and audiological assessments are
conducted to assess body structures An SLT assessment of speech sounds and
phonology are conducted to assess body functions However it is less likely that
SLTs consider activity and participation contextual and personal factors
Conversely teachers frequently consider activity and participation of children
Possible methods of evaluating activity and participation include an intelligibility
assessment or by gathering qualitative descriptions of successes and difficulties
in participation in the family school and social situations Determination of
parental wider family and school involvement support attitudes and expecta-
tions comprises evaluation of contextual factors Personal factors can include the
age of the child self-confidence motivation attention cognitive ability beliefs
learning style and experience with communication failure on intervention
Although there is close interrelationship between each of these areas goals
will be suggested for parts and components
Goals targeting functioning and disability
Body structures and functions
Children who are described as having a communication impairment of
(known) origin usually have impaired body structure(s) Impairment of body
structures can include a cleft palate anklyglossia or a malformed cochlea
among other examples Impairment-based goal setting for children with
impaired body structures often includes medical intervention such as surgical
repair of a cleft or a cochlear implant With the advancement of medical
science there is the potential for a decreasing need for extensive speech
intervention for people with impairment of body structures For example
Golding-Kushner (1995 327) has written that lsquoApproximately 80 of
children born with nonsyndromic cleft palate who undergo palate repair by
18 months of age develop speech free from compensatory errors without any
type of therapeutic interventionrsquo A social goal addressing impairment of body
structures could aim to promote societal acceptance of diversity of the
appearance of people For example a popular television show could include
a child who has a craniofacial anomaly in order to promote inclusiveness
204 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Impaired body structure can result in impaired body function For example
a person with a cleft palate may have nasal emission during speech An
impairment-based speech goal could therefore include reduction of audible
nasal emission during the production of high-pressure consonants (stops
fricatives and affricates) (Harding and Grunwell 1998) This may have the
social advantage of being more intelligible and less different or obtrusive
Other more subtle impairments in body structure and function that
influence speech production can be detected via oromusculature examination
(for example Ozanne 1992 Robbins and Klee 1987) with examples of
impaired body structure including tongue-tie and examples of body function
impairment include difficulty on diadochokinesis (rapid speech movement)
tasks Debate exists as to the impact on speech production as a result of these
more subtle impairments of body structure and function Similarly strong
debate surrounds the use of oral-motor exercises to facilitate speech sound
acquisition in children with speech impairment Lof (2003 9) provides a
summary of this debate and concludes the lsquothere is little if any theoretical
philosophical or clinical justification for using oral motor exercises to improve
speech sound production skillsrsquo
Impairments of body structure and function relating to hearing can be
detected via audiological examination such as tympanometry An example of
impairment of body structure is otitis media (glue ear) while an example of
body function impairment is hearing loss Controversy surrounds the inter-
relationship between otitis media (impaired body structure) and speech
perception=production (body function) Shriberg et al (2000a 2000b) has
altered the debate about whether or not otitis media is the cause of speech
impairment to the notion that there is increased risk of speech impairment as a
result of occurrences of otitis media However Campbell et al (2003 353)
found that lsquopersistent otitis media in the first three years of life did not
significantly increase the risk of speech delay after controlling for relevant
covariatesrsquo A social intervention relating to aural body structure and function
differences is the Healthy Little Ears project a health promotion project with
children in Australia (Mid Western Area Health Service 1999) Within this
programme children are encouraged to blow their nose each day to increase
functioning of the eustachian tube and decrease the occurrence of otitis
media
Genetics research has opened new areas of knowledge of impairment at the
micro level of body structure It may be the case that genetic abnormality may
account for children exhibiting impaired body function but previously thought
of as having intact body structures For example Lai et al (2001) described the
FOXP2 gene chromosome 7 as relating to speech apraxia Flipsen et al (2001)
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 205
have described acoustic markers that are indicative for genetic studies of
speech impairment The influence of these genetic breakthroughs on goal
setting in speech intervention may include discussion of familial histories
(for example Lewis et al 1989 Lewis and Freebairn 1993) and genetic
counselling Early intervention opportunities may be made for younger family
members of the child referred for speech intervention Early identification
can also lead to intervention opportunities to support academic success
particularly with respect to reading and spelling (Lewis et al 2000)
To date the majority of children who are seen by SLTs have communication
impairments of unknown origin (Shriberg et al 1986) indicating that their
body structure is considered to be intact These children have difficulty with
body functions such as the production of speech sounds Traditional SLT
measures of the speech function of these children have included the array of
articulation=phonology tests such as the Edinburgh Articulation Test (Anthony
et al 1971) and the Computerized Articulation and Phonology Evaluation
System (CAPES) (Masterson and Bernhardt 2002) The range of speech
analyses includes phonological analyses [for example Profile of Phonology
(PROPHthorn ) Long et al 2002] nonlinear analyses (Bernhardt and Stemberger
2000) and psycholinguistic analyses (Stackhouse and Wells 1993) Addition-
ally objective measures including acoustic (for example spectrographic) and
physiological (for example electropalatographic Gibbon 1999) tools are
enabling more accurate description of speech (Ball et al 2001) Children
with speech impairments may receive assessment reports concluding with
impairment-based goals such as to increase the percentage of consonants
correct (PCC) decrease the occurrence of various phonological processes or to
produce a list of phonemes expected but not produced correctly by the child
For children with impaired speech function there has been extensive debate
among SLTs regarding appropriate intervention goals Two dichotomous
approaches to goal selection have been proposed First the most knowledge
method (also called the traditional or developmental approach) and second the
least knowledge method (nontraditional nondevelopmental approach) (Bleile
1995) For the most knowledge method intervention goals differ minimally
from the sounds the child already produces (Elbert and Gierut 1986) That is
sounds or phonological processes are selected as intervention goals because
they are earlier developing stimulable and produced correctly in particular
contextual environments (Bernthal and Bankson 1998) In contrast in the least
knowledge method lsquo treatment targets differ from the childrsquos existing abilities
by multiple featuresrsquo (Elbert and Gierut 1986) Therefore sounds or processes
are selected because they are nonstimulable phonetically more complex have
phonologically marked properties reflect least phonological knowledge as
206 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
categorized by inventory constraints (with respect to phonemes) and are later
acquired (Gierut et al 1996) Gierut (1998) provides evidence that treatment
goals are achieved efficiently if children are taught sounds or sound pairs that
are not in a childrsquos pretreatment repertoire and developmentally later-acquired
sounds that are phonetically more complex acoustically undifferentiated and
nonstimulable that is following the least knowledge approach In contrast
Rvachew and Nowak (2001) compared the most knowledge (traditional) and
least knowledge (nontraditional) approaches for 48 children with moderate to
severe phonological disorders The study had four major findings children
made more progress toward acquiring target sounds through a traditional
approach the approaches did not differ in generalization from treated to
untreated sounds children liked both approaches parents were more favourable
to the traditional approach These authors have debated their different inter-
pretations of the outcomes of selecting the traditional and nontraditional
approaches in Morrisette and Gierut (2003) and Rvachew and Nowak (2003)
However Williams (2003) adds another dimension to this debate in her helpful
overview and discussion of five approaches to target selection As well as
the traditional and nontraditional approaches she includes markedness the
systemic function of sounds within a given sound system contrastive sounds
and lexical properties of treatment words She concludes by advocating more
research that addresses the impact of additive relationships between these
different approaches
Some questions following on from these approaches to impairment-based
goal selection by SLTs include the following Should treatment goals include
sounds for which the child is not stimulable (Powell 2003) Do children learn
sounds that are stimulable without having to be taught (Elbert and Gierut
1986 Powell and Miccio 1996) Should treatment goals target later-acquired
sounds Does teaching later-acquired sounds facilitate linguistic generaliza-
tion more readily than teaching earlier-acquired ones (Gierut 1998 Rvachew
and Nowak 2001) Although these questions need to be asked it is not
possible to predict with certainty what the most appropriate goal is for an
individual child In order to appropriately answer questions such as these
SLTs need to add to their impairment-based approach focusing on body
structures and functions The ICF provides additional areas of consideration to
enable appropriate goal setting for each individual
Activities and participation
The ICF model specifies consideration of activities and participation in
facilitating health and well-being Some that have relevance to children with
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 207
speech impairment include speaking conversation learning and applying
knowledge interpersonal interactions and relationships community social
and civic life Each of these will be addressed with relation to children with
speech impairment
Within the last decade SLTs have appropriated measures of activity and
participation that consider (to some extent) the social impact of speaking and
conversation One measure of activity that has been formalized as an assess-
ment practice is the level of intelligibility (Bleile 1995 Kent et al 1994
Kwiatkowski and Shriberg 1992) The Childrenrsquos Speech Intelligibility
Measure (Wilcox and Morris 1999) is one commercially available sampling
tool to quantify the extent of intelligibility of individual childrenrsquos speech by
untrained listeners There are few examples of ways in which SLTs consider
participation within speaking and conversation by children with speech
impairment One example is the Therapy Outcomes Measure (Enderby and
John 1997) which includes a specific subsection on childrenrsquos speech
Consideration of activities and participation also includes the influence of
the impairment on learning and applying knowledge With the high co-
occurrence of children with speech impairments having reading and spelling
difficulties (Larrivee and Catts 1999) it is essential that goals are developed
around the facilitation of academic skills (Hodson 1994) Intervention
targeting phonological awareness should accompany speech intervention
(Gillon 2000) Partnerships between teachers and SLTs are essential for
appropriate goal setting to facilitate successful oral and literate communicative
skills throughout the lives of these children
Further SLTs and teachers can consider interpersonal interactions and
relationships in their intervention planning for children with speech impair-
ment Pertinent social assessment practices may consist of a discussion with
the child his=her parents siblings friends grandparents and other significant
people to ascertain social goals and barriers interests and hopes (Duchan
2001a) Pretty (1995) suggested a number of goals congruent with a social
model for a four-year old girl with severe speech impairment The goals
focused on the interpersonal interactions and relationships with her family
teacher friends peers and peersrsquo parents For example the teacher and SLT
collaborated to promote communicative success at preschool including
strategies to repair communication breakdowns encouraging a group of her
peers to ask for repetition when they did not understand BJ or to ask BJ to
lsquoshow mersquo BJrsquos family were encouraged to look at her when she spoke to them
use all available cues (for example maintaining a diary of significant events
that she may want to communicate) and keep a list of BJrsquos pronunciations of
important words (for example the name of her best friend) These goals based
208 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
on activity and participation can readily be adapted for any child with a speech
impairment
Finally consideration of community social and civic life of children with
speech impairment is rarely discussed However there is scope for socially
based intervention goals to facilitate activity and participation in this context
Friends can be encouraged to spend time talking and babbling with a baby
who has a craniofacial anomaly in order to develop social interactions despite
the fact that the child may look different and have reduced time for social
interaction due to the extensive amount of time spent feeding Another
example of a social goal for people with a hearing impairment would consist
of public education to decrease background noise and to encourage people to
look at a person with a hearing impairment while talking with them
When considering activity and participation the ICF allows for comparison
between performance and capacity There may be a mismatch between a
childrsquos performance within their daily lives and their communicative capacity
on standardized speech assessment tools At times children are more capable
within the confines of a standardized assessment than they demonstrate within
the complex communicative demands of the classroom At other times
children exhibit a variety of compensatory strategies to minimize commu-
nicative difficulty that is evident on standardized assessment tasks Considera-
tion of performance and capacity is an important component within the
capability focus model described by Kwiatkowski and Shriberg (1993
1998) who have successfully tested this with hundreds of children who
have received speech intervention Even while undertaking standardized
assessment tools there may be a mismatch between performance on one
versus another demonstrating the mismatch between performance and capa-
city Some areas of difference include single word versus connected speech
(McLeod et al 1994 Morrison and Shriberg 1992) imitated versus sponta-
neous speech (Leonard et al 1978) stimulable versus nonstimulable sounds
(Powell and Miccio 1996) monosyllabic versus polysyllabic words (James et
al 2002) The difference between a childrsquos communicative performance and
capacity should be considered when developing appropriate goals
Contextual factors
Environmental factors
Some of the environmental factors mentioned by WHO that relate to children
with speech impairment include products and technology support and
relationships attitudes and services systems and policies
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 209
There is a burgeoning industry of products and technology utilizing speech-
activated devices for tasks such as computer operation word processing home
banking navigation and telephone directory assistance Intelligible speech is
essential for the use of speech-activated devices and can place restrictions on
the lives of adults who have residual speech impairments (Griffin et al 2001)
While children with speech impairment currently are not affected by this
technology if intelligible speech is not achieved by adulthood incorporation
within future society may be limited Further with the advances of technology
it is possible that speech-activated devices may be a common part of living for
children and adults alike
Probably the most important environmental factor relating to children with
speech impairment is support and relationships The incorporation of parental
support into the intervention practices is frequently a key to success (see
Bowen this issue) There is some research suggesting links between inter-
vention outcomes and environmental factors such as socioeconomic status
maternal IQ and maternal educational level (Chan et al 1998) Wider
networks of family friends and teachers are also important environmental
influences
Societal attitudes towards children adolescents and adults with speech
impairments are frequently negative (Crowe Hall 1991 Madison 1992
Silverman and Falk 1992) For example Silverman and Paulus (1989)
compared childrenrsquos attitudes towards a child who uses=w=for=r=with a typical
speaker The child with the mild speech impairment was considered to be less
talkative and hear less well than his=her peers dysfluent unpleasant to listen
to soft boring dull more tense nervous afraid handicapped isolated
uncomfortable Further Anderson and Antonak (1992) found that social
acceptance of an actor with a mild speech sound impairment was less
positive than the same actor demonstrating a physical disability Research
by Felsenfeld et al (1992) adds another dimension people with speech
impairment were found to be less extroverted and socialized with fewer
people than people with typical speech development Clearly people with
speech impairment may be compromised by societal attitudes necessitating
goals directed towards society as well as working at the impairment level
The services systems and policies relating to individual children are as
varied as each individual and can influence the type of schooling the child
receives the type and amount of support the child receives at school whether
a child is eligible for SLT intervention and so forth Political factors can affect
the actuality of intervention for individual clients For example in some health
sectors within the USA the politicization of health care dictates the number of
SLT sessions a person with a particular impairment can receive Philosophical
210 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
attitudes toward the labelling of a child with a speech or language impairment
can influence the type of goals developed for a child (Christensen and Baker
2002 Green and Kostogriz 2002) For example McDermott (1993 272) has
argued that lsquothere is no such thing as LD [Learning Disability] only a social
practice of displaying noticing documenting remediating and explaining itrsquo
McLeod (2003) described the distinction between the use of the terms
lsquonormalrsquo and lsquotypicalrsquo and SLTsrsquo role in the categorization of children along
the normalndashabnormal divide Simmons-Mackie (2001) described differing
clinical assumptions leading to differing intervention approaches A childrsquos
experiences of receiving intervention from different people with differing
clinical assumptions is documented by Kovarsky (2001) Thus services
systems and policies can play a role in goal setting for children with speech
impairment
Personal factors
Attached to every lsquospeech impairmentrsquo is a real child (Bleile 1991) His or her
unique makeup must be considered within his=her cultural milieu in order to
determine the most appropriate intervention goals The ICF (WHO 2001 8)
recognizes the lsquolarge social and cultural variancersquo including gender age other
health conditions coping style social background education profession past
experience and character style Currently research into typically developing
children has demonstrated the wide range of individual differences (for
example McLeod et al 2001) For children with speech impairment there
are some case studies documenting the effect of personal factors on appro-
priate goal setting and intervention outcomes For example Kamhi (2000)
describes the progress of phonological intervention with his daughter Franne
Frannersquos lsquostubbornnessrsquo and desire to communicate with her parents led to
delineation between speech sound practice with her SLT and meaningful
communication with her parents He writes lsquoFrannersquos reluctance to practise
speech sounds was her way to let us know that we should focus on what
she said when she spoke rather than on how she said itrsquo (Kamhi 2000 183)
One important and documented factor to consider in the selection of speech
goals is the childrsquos personal ability to evaluate his=her speech Self-evaluation
occurs when the child judges the accuracy of his=her response prior to explicit
feedback from the clinician (cf Koegel et al 1986) lsquoSelf-evaluation appears
to be a central concept within diverse theoretical views of normal speech
development and within approaches to and explications of successful
interventionrsquo (Shriberg and Kwiatkowski 1987 154) Thus SLTs can incor-
porate self-evaluation within the intervention goals
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 211
Conclusion What goals are appropriate
It can be argued that the ultimate goal of speech intervention is to bring about
correct production of speech sounds resulting in intelligible conversational
speech within a childrsquos milieu (cf Kamhi 2000 Powell 1991) However
other similarly important goals may be to enhance a childrsquos participation in
social interaction to increase self-esteem or to decrease negative societal
attitudes towards people with speech impairment The ICF is a meta-theory
that allows for consideration of all these possibilities and is enhanced by
collaboration between SLTs and teachers A summary of possible goals
relating to the ICF is provided in Table 1 The most important outcome of
the present discussion is to reiterate that every child is unique requiring a
different approach to best meet their needs (Lowe 1994) Thus it is important
to consider all the factors before making a decision then to devise goals in
consultation and monitor progress (see Baker and McLeod this issue)
Continual revision and consultation will result in appropriate outcomes for
individual children as well as society
References
American Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Scope of practice in
speech-language pathology Rockville MD ASHA
Anderson R J and Antonak R F 1992 The influence of attitudes and
contact on reactions to persons with physical and speech disabilities
Rehabilitation Counselling Bulletin 35 240ndash47
Anthony A Bogle D Ingram T T S and McIsaac M W 1971 The
Edinburgh articulation test Edinburgh E and S Livingstone
Baker E and McLeod S 2004 Evidence-based management of children with
phonological impairment of unknown origin Child Language Teaching
and Therapy 20 261ndash85
Ball M J Gracco V and Stone M 2001 A comparison of imaging
techniques for the investigation of normal and disordered speech produc-
tion Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 313ndash24
Bernhardt B H and Stemberger J P 2000 Workbook in nonlinear phonology
for clinical application Austin TX ProEd
Bernthal J E and Bankson N W 1998 Articulation and phonological
disorders 4th edition Boston Allyn and Bacon
Bleile K M 1991 Individual differences In Bleile K M editor Child
phonology a book of exercises for students San Diego CA Singular 57ndash71
212 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Bleile K M 1995 Manual of articulation and phonological disorders San
Diego CA Singular
Bourgeois M S 1998 Functional outcome assessment of adults with
dementia Seminars in Speech and Hearing 19 261ndash75
Bowen C 2004 Child Language Teaching and Therapy 20 245ndash60
Campbell T F Dollaghan C A Rockette H E Paradise J L Feldman H
M Shriberg L D Sabo D L and Kurs-Lasky M 2003 Risk factors
for speech delay of unknown origin in 3-year-old children Child
Development 74 346ndash57
Chan A McAllister L and Wilson L 1998 An investigation of the agendash
MLU relationship and factors which predict MLU in two and three year
old Australian children Asia Pacific Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing 3 97ndash108
Christensen C A and Baker C D 2002 Pedagogy observation and
the construction of learning disability Pedagogy Culture and Society
10 73ndash93
Crowe Hall B J 1991 Attitudes of fourth and sixth graders toward peers with
mild articulation disorders Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 22 334ndash40
Duchan J F 2001a Impairment and social views of speech-language
pathology clinical practices re-examined Advances in Speech-Language
Pathology 3 37ndash46
Duchan J F 2001b Social and impairment approaches viewed in a forest and
in the shadows of a city street Advances in Speech-Language Pathology
3 73ndash79
Eadie T L 2003 The ICF A proposed framework for comprehensive
rehabilitation of individuals who use alaryngeal speech American
Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 12 189ndash97
Elbert M and Gierut J A 1986 Handbook of clinical phonology
approaches to assessment and treatment London Taylor amp Francis
Enderby P and John A 1997 Therapy outcome measures speech-language
pathology technical manual London Singular
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1992 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder linguistic
and personality results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35
1114ndash25
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1994 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder educational
and occupational results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37
1341ndash53
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 213
Flipsen P Shriberg L D Weismer G Karlsson H B and McSweeny J L
2001 Acoustic phenotypes for speech-genetics studies reference data for
residual =3= distortions Clinical Linguistics and Phonetics 15 603ndash30
Gibbon F E 1999 Undifferentiated lingual gestures in children with
articulation=phonological disorders Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing Research 42 382ndash97
Gierut J A 1998 Treatment efficacy functional phonological disorders in
children Journal of Speech Language Hearing Research 41 S85ndash100
Gierut J A Morrisette M L Hughes M T and Rowland S 1996
Phonological treatment efficacy and developmental norms Language
Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 27 215ndash30
Gillon G T 2000 The efficacy of phonological awareness intervention for
children with spoken language impairment Language Speech and Hear-
ing Services in Schools 31 126ndash41
Goldman R and Fristoe M 1986 Goldman Fristoe Test of Articulation
Revised Circle Pines MN American Guidance Service
Green B and Kostogriz A 2002 Learning difficulties and the new literacy
studies a socially critical perspective In Soler J Wearmouth J and
Reid G editors Contextualising difficulties in literacy development
exploring politics culture ethnicity and ethics Milton Keynes The Open
University
Griffin S Wilson L Clark L and McLeod S 2001 Speech pathology
applications of automatic speech recognition technology In Wilson L
and Hewat S editors Proceedings of the 2001 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
293ndash99
Golding-Kushner K 1995 Treatment of articulation and resonance disorders
associated with cleft palate and VPI In Shprintzen R and Bardach J
editors Cleft palate speech management a multidisciplinary approach
St Louis Mosby 327ndash63
Harasty J and Reed V A 1994 The prevalence of speech and language
impairment in two Sydney metropolitan schools Australian Journal of
Human Communication Disorders 22 1ndash23
Harding A and Grunwell P 1998 Active versus passive cleft-type speech
characteristics International Journal of Language and Communication
Disorders 33 329ndash52
Hersh D 1999 Impairment to empowerment social model theory and
aphasia therapy In McLeod S and McAllister L editors Proceedings
of the 1999 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 125ndash30
214 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Hodge M 1983 Assessment and treatment of a child with a developmental
speech disorder a biological behavioural perspective Seminars in Speech
and Language 14 128ndash41
Hodson B W 1994 Helping individuals become intelligible literate and
articulate the role of phonology Topics in Language Disorders 14 1ndash16
Hodson B W and Paden E P 1981 Phonological processes which
characterize unintelligible and intelligible speech in early childhood
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 46 369ndash73
James D van Doorn J and McLeod S 2002 Segment production in mono-
di- and polysyllabic words in children aged 3ndash7 years In Windsor F
Kelly L and Hewlett N editors Themes in Clinical Phonetics and
Linguistics Hillsdale NJ Lawrence Erlbaum 287ndash98
Jordan L and Kaiser W 1996 Aphasia a social approach London
Chapman and Hall
Kamhi A G 2000 Practice makes perfect the incompatibility of practicing
speech and meaningful communication Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 31 182ndash85
Kent R D Miolo G and Bloedel S 1994 The intelligibility of childrenrsquos
speech a review of evaluation procedures American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 3 81ndash95
Koegel L K Koegel R L and Costello-Ingham J 1986 Programming
rapid generalization of correct articulation through self-monitoring proce-
dures Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 24ndash32
Kovarsky D 2001 Ruminating on impairments-based assessment and inter-
vention Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 59ndash62
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1992 Intelligibility assessment in
developmental phonological disorders accuracy of caregiver gloss
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35 1095ndash1104
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1993 Speech normalization in develop-
mental phonological disorders a retrospective study of capability-focus
theory Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 24 10ndash18
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1998 The capability-focus treatment
framework for child speech disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 7 27ndash38
Lai C S L Fisher S E Hurst J A Vargha-Khadem F and Monaco A P
2001 A forkhead-domain gene is mutated in severe speech and language
disorder Nature 413 519ndash23
Larrivee L S and Catts H W 1999 Early reading achievement in children
with expressive phonological disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 8 118ndash28
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 215
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
Ta
ble
1C
on
tin
ue
d
ICF
pa
rts
ICF
com
po
ne
nts
ICF
de
scri
pto
rsre
lati
ng
toco
mm
un
ica
tio
n
Po
ssib
leco
mp
on
en
tso
fa
nS
LT
ass
ess
me
nt
an
da
na
lysi
sIm
pa
irm
en
t-b
ase
dg
oa
lsS
oci
ally
-ba
sed
go
als
P
resc
ho
ol
ed
uca
tio
n
Co
mm
un
ity
so
cia
la
nd
civ
iclife
P
rom
ote
com
mu
nic
ati
ve
succ
ess
by
ma
inta
inin
ga
dia
ryo
fsi
gn
ifica
nt
ev
en
tsth
at
the
child
ma
yw
an
tto
com
mu
ni-
cate
an
dke
ep
ing
alist
on
the
frid
ge
of
the
child
rsquosp
ron
un
-ci
ati
on
so
fim
po
rta
nt
wo
rds
II
Co
nte
xtu
al
fact
ors
En
vir
on
me
nta
lfa
cto
rs
P
rod
uct
sa
nd
tech
no
log
y
Su
pp
ort
an
dre
lati
on
ship
s
Att
itu
de
s
Se
rvic
es
syst
em
sa
nd
po
lici
es
D
ete
rmin
ep
are
nta
lw
ide
rfa
mily
an
dsc
ho
ol
inv
olv
em
en
ta
nd
sup
po
rt
De
term
ine
att
itu
de
sa
nd
ex
pe
cta
tio
ns
of
the
child
rsquosfa
mily
an
dco
mm
un
ity
reg
ard
ing
soci
al
occ
up
ati
on
al
an
de
du
cati
on
al
asp
ira
tio
ns
D
ete
rmin
eg
ov
ern
me
nta
lp
olici
es
reg
ard
ing
the
nu
mb
er
of
fun
de
din
ter-
ve
nti
on
sess
ion
se
tc
mdashmdash
Pe
rso
na
lfa
cto
rsA
ttri
bu
tes
of
the
pe
rso
n
an
dth
ein
tern
al
infl
ue
nce
so
nfu
nct
ion
ing
an
dd
isa
bilit
y
D
iscu
ssth
ein
flu
en
ceo
fa
ge
of
child
se
lf-
con
fid
en
ce
mo
tiv
ati
on
att
en
tio
n
cog
nit
ive
ab
ilit
y
be
lie
fs
lea
rnin
gst
yle
a
nd
ex
pe
rie
nce
wit
hco
mm
un
ica
tio
nfa
ilu
re
mdashmdash
202 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
the nose mouth pharynx and larynx Body functions describes lsquothe physiolo-
gical functions of body systemsrsquo (WHO 2001 10) Included in the category of
body functions are lsquovoice functionsrsquo such as production and quality of voice
lsquospeech functionsrsquo including the articulation of phonemes and lsquomental func-
tions of languagersquo including expression of spoken language Activity is lsquothe
execution of a task by an individualrsquo (WHO 2001 10) and participation
describes the involvement in a life situation Thus under the heading of activity
and participation communication in its many forms is included as an entire
chapter within the ICF (chapter 3) Some of the highlighted aspects of
communication include lsquoCommunicating with ndash receiving ndash spoken messagesrsquo
lsquospeakingrsquo and lsquoconversationrsquo Other relevant categories of activity and
participation include learning and applying knowledge (chapter 1) such as
lsquolearning to readrsquo and lsquolearning to writersquo Additionally activities and participa-
tion include interpersonal interactions and relationships (chapter 7) major life
areas such as preschool education (chapter 8) and community social and civic
life (chapter 9) Finally the term disability lsquoserves as an umbrella term for
impairments activity limitation and participation restrictionsrsquo (WHO 2001 3)
Part 2 of the ICF is titled lsquoContextual factorsrsquo and includes environmental and
personal factors (see Table 1) Environmental factors lsquomake up the physical
social and attitudinal environment in which people live and conduct their livesrsquo
(WHO 2001 10) and can be facilitators or barriers Environmental factors
relevant to communication include products and technology (chapter 1) support
and relationships (chapter 3) attitudes (chapter 4) services systems and policies
(chapter 5) Personal factors include the attributes of the person and the internal
influences on functioning and disability Due to the individuality of this WHO
component personal factors are not specified as chapters within the ICF
Within the field of communication disorders there has been some use of the
ICF (and its predecessors) as a meta-theory for practice (for example American
Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Threats 2000 2001 Worrall
1999 2001) The application of the ICF (and its predecessors) has particularly
occurred within the context of SLTs working with adults who have dementia
experienced a stroke or acquired brain injury (for example Bourgeois 1998
Hersh 1999 Worrall 1999) with adults who have voice disorders (Ma and Yiu
2001a 2001b) including those who use alaryngeal speech (Eadie 2003) There
have also been some descriptions of the use of a social model of interaction in
speech and language practice with children (for example Duchan 2001a 2001b
Kovarsky 2001 Locke 2000) but limited direct application of the ICF to the
consideration of the speech of children The exception is the excellent work by
Hodge (1983) who applied the original 1980 version of the WHO model to
assessment and intervention practices with a child who had a speech impairment
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 203
In order to explore the application of the ICF to child language teaching and
therapy each of the parts and components of the ICF will be discussed with
relation to childrenrsquos speech production Table 1 lists each of the parts and
components of the ICF and their application to a speech and language assess-
ment in order to inform goal setting Many of these assessments and analyses are
typically included in traditional SLT assessments (see the forum led by Williams
2002) For example oromuscular examinations and audiological assessments are
conducted to assess body structures An SLT assessment of speech sounds and
phonology are conducted to assess body functions However it is less likely that
SLTs consider activity and participation contextual and personal factors
Conversely teachers frequently consider activity and participation of children
Possible methods of evaluating activity and participation include an intelligibility
assessment or by gathering qualitative descriptions of successes and difficulties
in participation in the family school and social situations Determination of
parental wider family and school involvement support attitudes and expecta-
tions comprises evaluation of contextual factors Personal factors can include the
age of the child self-confidence motivation attention cognitive ability beliefs
learning style and experience with communication failure on intervention
Although there is close interrelationship between each of these areas goals
will be suggested for parts and components
Goals targeting functioning and disability
Body structures and functions
Children who are described as having a communication impairment of
(known) origin usually have impaired body structure(s) Impairment of body
structures can include a cleft palate anklyglossia or a malformed cochlea
among other examples Impairment-based goal setting for children with
impaired body structures often includes medical intervention such as surgical
repair of a cleft or a cochlear implant With the advancement of medical
science there is the potential for a decreasing need for extensive speech
intervention for people with impairment of body structures For example
Golding-Kushner (1995 327) has written that lsquoApproximately 80 of
children born with nonsyndromic cleft palate who undergo palate repair by
18 months of age develop speech free from compensatory errors without any
type of therapeutic interventionrsquo A social goal addressing impairment of body
structures could aim to promote societal acceptance of diversity of the
appearance of people For example a popular television show could include
a child who has a craniofacial anomaly in order to promote inclusiveness
204 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Impaired body structure can result in impaired body function For example
a person with a cleft palate may have nasal emission during speech An
impairment-based speech goal could therefore include reduction of audible
nasal emission during the production of high-pressure consonants (stops
fricatives and affricates) (Harding and Grunwell 1998) This may have the
social advantage of being more intelligible and less different or obtrusive
Other more subtle impairments in body structure and function that
influence speech production can be detected via oromusculature examination
(for example Ozanne 1992 Robbins and Klee 1987) with examples of
impaired body structure including tongue-tie and examples of body function
impairment include difficulty on diadochokinesis (rapid speech movement)
tasks Debate exists as to the impact on speech production as a result of these
more subtle impairments of body structure and function Similarly strong
debate surrounds the use of oral-motor exercises to facilitate speech sound
acquisition in children with speech impairment Lof (2003 9) provides a
summary of this debate and concludes the lsquothere is little if any theoretical
philosophical or clinical justification for using oral motor exercises to improve
speech sound production skillsrsquo
Impairments of body structure and function relating to hearing can be
detected via audiological examination such as tympanometry An example of
impairment of body structure is otitis media (glue ear) while an example of
body function impairment is hearing loss Controversy surrounds the inter-
relationship between otitis media (impaired body structure) and speech
perception=production (body function) Shriberg et al (2000a 2000b) has
altered the debate about whether or not otitis media is the cause of speech
impairment to the notion that there is increased risk of speech impairment as a
result of occurrences of otitis media However Campbell et al (2003 353)
found that lsquopersistent otitis media in the first three years of life did not
significantly increase the risk of speech delay after controlling for relevant
covariatesrsquo A social intervention relating to aural body structure and function
differences is the Healthy Little Ears project a health promotion project with
children in Australia (Mid Western Area Health Service 1999) Within this
programme children are encouraged to blow their nose each day to increase
functioning of the eustachian tube and decrease the occurrence of otitis
media
Genetics research has opened new areas of knowledge of impairment at the
micro level of body structure It may be the case that genetic abnormality may
account for children exhibiting impaired body function but previously thought
of as having intact body structures For example Lai et al (2001) described the
FOXP2 gene chromosome 7 as relating to speech apraxia Flipsen et al (2001)
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 205
have described acoustic markers that are indicative for genetic studies of
speech impairment The influence of these genetic breakthroughs on goal
setting in speech intervention may include discussion of familial histories
(for example Lewis et al 1989 Lewis and Freebairn 1993) and genetic
counselling Early intervention opportunities may be made for younger family
members of the child referred for speech intervention Early identification
can also lead to intervention opportunities to support academic success
particularly with respect to reading and spelling (Lewis et al 2000)
To date the majority of children who are seen by SLTs have communication
impairments of unknown origin (Shriberg et al 1986) indicating that their
body structure is considered to be intact These children have difficulty with
body functions such as the production of speech sounds Traditional SLT
measures of the speech function of these children have included the array of
articulation=phonology tests such as the Edinburgh Articulation Test (Anthony
et al 1971) and the Computerized Articulation and Phonology Evaluation
System (CAPES) (Masterson and Bernhardt 2002) The range of speech
analyses includes phonological analyses [for example Profile of Phonology
(PROPHthorn ) Long et al 2002] nonlinear analyses (Bernhardt and Stemberger
2000) and psycholinguistic analyses (Stackhouse and Wells 1993) Addition-
ally objective measures including acoustic (for example spectrographic) and
physiological (for example electropalatographic Gibbon 1999) tools are
enabling more accurate description of speech (Ball et al 2001) Children
with speech impairments may receive assessment reports concluding with
impairment-based goals such as to increase the percentage of consonants
correct (PCC) decrease the occurrence of various phonological processes or to
produce a list of phonemes expected but not produced correctly by the child
For children with impaired speech function there has been extensive debate
among SLTs regarding appropriate intervention goals Two dichotomous
approaches to goal selection have been proposed First the most knowledge
method (also called the traditional or developmental approach) and second the
least knowledge method (nontraditional nondevelopmental approach) (Bleile
1995) For the most knowledge method intervention goals differ minimally
from the sounds the child already produces (Elbert and Gierut 1986) That is
sounds or phonological processes are selected as intervention goals because
they are earlier developing stimulable and produced correctly in particular
contextual environments (Bernthal and Bankson 1998) In contrast in the least
knowledge method lsquo treatment targets differ from the childrsquos existing abilities
by multiple featuresrsquo (Elbert and Gierut 1986) Therefore sounds or processes
are selected because they are nonstimulable phonetically more complex have
phonologically marked properties reflect least phonological knowledge as
206 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
categorized by inventory constraints (with respect to phonemes) and are later
acquired (Gierut et al 1996) Gierut (1998) provides evidence that treatment
goals are achieved efficiently if children are taught sounds or sound pairs that
are not in a childrsquos pretreatment repertoire and developmentally later-acquired
sounds that are phonetically more complex acoustically undifferentiated and
nonstimulable that is following the least knowledge approach In contrast
Rvachew and Nowak (2001) compared the most knowledge (traditional) and
least knowledge (nontraditional) approaches for 48 children with moderate to
severe phonological disorders The study had four major findings children
made more progress toward acquiring target sounds through a traditional
approach the approaches did not differ in generalization from treated to
untreated sounds children liked both approaches parents were more favourable
to the traditional approach These authors have debated their different inter-
pretations of the outcomes of selecting the traditional and nontraditional
approaches in Morrisette and Gierut (2003) and Rvachew and Nowak (2003)
However Williams (2003) adds another dimension to this debate in her helpful
overview and discussion of five approaches to target selection As well as
the traditional and nontraditional approaches she includes markedness the
systemic function of sounds within a given sound system contrastive sounds
and lexical properties of treatment words She concludes by advocating more
research that addresses the impact of additive relationships between these
different approaches
Some questions following on from these approaches to impairment-based
goal selection by SLTs include the following Should treatment goals include
sounds for which the child is not stimulable (Powell 2003) Do children learn
sounds that are stimulable without having to be taught (Elbert and Gierut
1986 Powell and Miccio 1996) Should treatment goals target later-acquired
sounds Does teaching later-acquired sounds facilitate linguistic generaliza-
tion more readily than teaching earlier-acquired ones (Gierut 1998 Rvachew
and Nowak 2001) Although these questions need to be asked it is not
possible to predict with certainty what the most appropriate goal is for an
individual child In order to appropriately answer questions such as these
SLTs need to add to their impairment-based approach focusing on body
structures and functions The ICF provides additional areas of consideration to
enable appropriate goal setting for each individual
Activities and participation
The ICF model specifies consideration of activities and participation in
facilitating health and well-being Some that have relevance to children with
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 207
speech impairment include speaking conversation learning and applying
knowledge interpersonal interactions and relationships community social
and civic life Each of these will be addressed with relation to children with
speech impairment
Within the last decade SLTs have appropriated measures of activity and
participation that consider (to some extent) the social impact of speaking and
conversation One measure of activity that has been formalized as an assess-
ment practice is the level of intelligibility (Bleile 1995 Kent et al 1994
Kwiatkowski and Shriberg 1992) The Childrenrsquos Speech Intelligibility
Measure (Wilcox and Morris 1999) is one commercially available sampling
tool to quantify the extent of intelligibility of individual childrenrsquos speech by
untrained listeners There are few examples of ways in which SLTs consider
participation within speaking and conversation by children with speech
impairment One example is the Therapy Outcomes Measure (Enderby and
John 1997) which includes a specific subsection on childrenrsquos speech
Consideration of activities and participation also includes the influence of
the impairment on learning and applying knowledge With the high co-
occurrence of children with speech impairments having reading and spelling
difficulties (Larrivee and Catts 1999) it is essential that goals are developed
around the facilitation of academic skills (Hodson 1994) Intervention
targeting phonological awareness should accompany speech intervention
(Gillon 2000) Partnerships between teachers and SLTs are essential for
appropriate goal setting to facilitate successful oral and literate communicative
skills throughout the lives of these children
Further SLTs and teachers can consider interpersonal interactions and
relationships in their intervention planning for children with speech impair-
ment Pertinent social assessment practices may consist of a discussion with
the child his=her parents siblings friends grandparents and other significant
people to ascertain social goals and barriers interests and hopes (Duchan
2001a) Pretty (1995) suggested a number of goals congruent with a social
model for a four-year old girl with severe speech impairment The goals
focused on the interpersonal interactions and relationships with her family
teacher friends peers and peersrsquo parents For example the teacher and SLT
collaborated to promote communicative success at preschool including
strategies to repair communication breakdowns encouraging a group of her
peers to ask for repetition when they did not understand BJ or to ask BJ to
lsquoshow mersquo BJrsquos family were encouraged to look at her when she spoke to them
use all available cues (for example maintaining a diary of significant events
that she may want to communicate) and keep a list of BJrsquos pronunciations of
important words (for example the name of her best friend) These goals based
208 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
on activity and participation can readily be adapted for any child with a speech
impairment
Finally consideration of community social and civic life of children with
speech impairment is rarely discussed However there is scope for socially
based intervention goals to facilitate activity and participation in this context
Friends can be encouraged to spend time talking and babbling with a baby
who has a craniofacial anomaly in order to develop social interactions despite
the fact that the child may look different and have reduced time for social
interaction due to the extensive amount of time spent feeding Another
example of a social goal for people with a hearing impairment would consist
of public education to decrease background noise and to encourage people to
look at a person with a hearing impairment while talking with them
When considering activity and participation the ICF allows for comparison
between performance and capacity There may be a mismatch between a
childrsquos performance within their daily lives and their communicative capacity
on standardized speech assessment tools At times children are more capable
within the confines of a standardized assessment than they demonstrate within
the complex communicative demands of the classroom At other times
children exhibit a variety of compensatory strategies to minimize commu-
nicative difficulty that is evident on standardized assessment tasks Considera-
tion of performance and capacity is an important component within the
capability focus model described by Kwiatkowski and Shriberg (1993
1998) who have successfully tested this with hundreds of children who
have received speech intervention Even while undertaking standardized
assessment tools there may be a mismatch between performance on one
versus another demonstrating the mismatch between performance and capa-
city Some areas of difference include single word versus connected speech
(McLeod et al 1994 Morrison and Shriberg 1992) imitated versus sponta-
neous speech (Leonard et al 1978) stimulable versus nonstimulable sounds
(Powell and Miccio 1996) monosyllabic versus polysyllabic words (James et
al 2002) The difference between a childrsquos communicative performance and
capacity should be considered when developing appropriate goals
Contextual factors
Environmental factors
Some of the environmental factors mentioned by WHO that relate to children
with speech impairment include products and technology support and
relationships attitudes and services systems and policies
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 209
There is a burgeoning industry of products and technology utilizing speech-
activated devices for tasks such as computer operation word processing home
banking navigation and telephone directory assistance Intelligible speech is
essential for the use of speech-activated devices and can place restrictions on
the lives of adults who have residual speech impairments (Griffin et al 2001)
While children with speech impairment currently are not affected by this
technology if intelligible speech is not achieved by adulthood incorporation
within future society may be limited Further with the advances of technology
it is possible that speech-activated devices may be a common part of living for
children and adults alike
Probably the most important environmental factor relating to children with
speech impairment is support and relationships The incorporation of parental
support into the intervention practices is frequently a key to success (see
Bowen this issue) There is some research suggesting links between inter-
vention outcomes and environmental factors such as socioeconomic status
maternal IQ and maternal educational level (Chan et al 1998) Wider
networks of family friends and teachers are also important environmental
influences
Societal attitudes towards children adolescents and adults with speech
impairments are frequently negative (Crowe Hall 1991 Madison 1992
Silverman and Falk 1992) For example Silverman and Paulus (1989)
compared childrenrsquos attitudes towards a child who uses=w=for=r=with a typical
speaker The child with the mild speech impairment was considered to be less
talkative and hear less well than his=her peers dysfluent unpleasant to listen
to soft boring dull more tense nervous afraid handicapped isolated
uncomfortable Further Anderson and Antonak (1992) found that social
acceptance of an actor with a mild speech sound impairment was less
positive than the same actor demonstrating a physical disability Research
by Felsenfeld et al (1992) adds another dimension people with speech
impairment were found to be less extroverted and socialized with fewer
people than people with typical speech development Clearly people with
speech impairment may be compromised by societal attitudes necessitating
goals directed towards society as well as working at the impairment level
The services systems and policies relating to individual children are as
varied as each individual and can influence the type of schooling the child
receives the type and amount of support the child receives at school whether
a child is eligible for SLT intervention and so forth Political factors can affect
the actuality of intervention for individual clients For example in some health
sectors within the USA the politicization of health care dictates the number of
SLT sessions a person with a particular impairment can receive Philosophical
210 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
attitudes toward the labelling of a child with a speech or language impairment
can influence the type of goals developed for a child (Christensen and Baker
2002 Green and Kostogriz 2002) For example McDermott (1993 272) has
argued that lsquothere is no such thing as LD [Learning Disability] only a social
practice of displaying noticing documenting remediating and explaining itrsquo
McLeod (2003) described the distinction between the use of the terms
lsquonormalrsquo and lsquotypicalrsquo and SLTsrsquo role in the categorization of children along
the normalndashabnormal divide Simmons-Mackie (2001) described differing
clinical assumptions leading to differing intervention approaches A childrsquos
experiences of receiving intervention from different people with differing
clinical assumptions is documented by Kovarsky (2001) Thus services
systems and policies can play a role in goal setting for children with speech
impairment
Personal factors
Attached to every lsquospeech impairmentrsquo is a real child (Bleile 1991) His or her
unique makeup must be considered within his=her cultural milieu in order to
determine the most appropriate intervention goals The ICF (WHO 2001 8)
recognizes the lsquolarge social and cultural variancersquo including gender age other
health conditions coping style social background education profession past
experience and character style Currently research into typically developing
children has demonstrated the wide range of individual differences (for
example McLeod et al 2001) For children with speech impairment there
are some case studies documenting the effect of personal factors on appro-
priate goal setting and intervention outcomes For example Kamhi (2000)
describes the progress of phonological intervention with his daughter Franne
Frannersquos lsquostubbornnessrsquo and desire to communicate with her parents led to
delineation between speech sound practice with her SLT and meaningful
communication with her parents He writes lsquoFrannersquos reluctance to practise
speech sounds was her way to let us know that we should focus on what
she said when she spoke rather than on how she said itrsquo (Kamhi 2000 183)
One important and documented factor to consider in the selection of speech
goals is the childrsquos personal ability to evaluate his=her speech Self-evaluation
occurs when the child judges the accuracy of his=her response prior to explicit
feedback from the clinician (cf Koegel et al 1986) lsquoSelf-evaluation appears
to be a central concept within diverse theoretical views of normal speech
development and within approaches to and explications of successful
interventionrsquo (Shriberg and Kwiatkowski 1987 154) Thus SLTs can incor-
porate self-evaluation within the intervention goals
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 211
Conclusion What goals are appropriate
It can be argued that the ultimate goal of speech intervention is to bring about
correct production of speech sounds resulting in intelligible conversational
speech within a childrsquos milieu (cf Kamhi 2000 Powell 1991) However
other similarly important goals may be to enhance a childrsquos participation in
social interaction to increase self-esteem or to decrease negative societal
attitudes towards people with speech impairment The ICF is a meta-theory
that allows for consideration of all these possibilities and is enhanced by
collaboration between SLTs and teachers A summary of possible goals
relating to the ICF is provided in Table 1 The most important outcome of
the present discussion is to reiterate that every child is unique requiring a
different approach to best meet their needs (Lowe 1994) Thus it is important
to consider all the factors before making a decision then to devise goals in
consultation and monitor progress (see Baker and McLeod this issue)
Continual revision and consultation will result in appropriate outcomes for
individual children as well as society
References
American Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Scope of practice in
speech-language pathology Rockville MD ASHA
Anderson R J and Antonak R F 1992 The influence of attitudes and
contact on reactions to persons with physical and speech disabilities
Rehabilitation Counselling Bulletin 35 240ndash47
Anthony A Bogle D Ingram T T S and McIsaac M W 1971 The
Edinburgh articulation test Edinburgh E and S Livingstone
Baker E and McLeod S 2004 Evidence-based management of children with
phonological impairment of unknown origin Child Language Teaching
and Therapy 20 261ndash85
Ball M J Gracco V and Stone M 2001 A comparison of imaging
techniques for the investigation of normal and disordered speech produc-
tion Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 313ndash24
Bernhardt B H and Stemberger J P 2000 Workbook in nonlinear phonology
for clinical application Austin TX ProEd
Bernthal J E and Bankson N W 1998 Articulation and phonological
disorders 4th edition Boston Allyn and Bacon
Bleile K M 1991 Individual differences In Bleile K M editor Child
phonology a book of exercises for students San Diego CA Singular 57ndash71
212 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Bleile K M 1995 Manual of articulation and phonological disorders San
Diego CA Singular
Bourgeois M S 1998 Functional outcome assessment of adults with
dementia Seminars in Speech and Hearing 19 261ndash75
Bowen C 2004 Child Language Teaching and Therapy 20 245ndash60
Campbell T F Dollaghan C A Rockette H E Paradise J L Feldman H
M Shriberg L D Sabo D L and Kurs-Lasky M 2003 Risk factors
for speech delay of unknown origin in 3-year-old children Child
Development 74 346ndash57
Chan A McAllister L and Wilson L 1998 An investigation of the agendash
MLU relationship and factors which predict MLU in two and three year
old Australian children Asia Pacific Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing 3 97ndash108
Christensen C A and Baker C D 2002 Pedagogy observation and
the construction of learning disability Pedagogy Culture and Society
10 73ndash93
Crowe Hall B J 1991 Attitudes of fourth and sixth graders toward peers with
mild articulation disorders Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 22 334ndash40
Duchan J F 2001a Impairment and social views of speech-language
pathology clinical practices re-examined Advances in Speech-Language
Pathology 3 37ndash46
Duchan J F 2001b Social and impairment approaches viewed in a forest and
in the shadows of a city street Advances in Speech-Language Pathology
3 73ndash79
Eadie T L 2003 The ICF A proposed framework for comprehensive
rehabilitation of individuals who use alaryngeal speech American
Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 12 189ndash97
Elbert M and Gierut J A 1986 Handbook of clinical phonology
approaches to assessment and treatment London Taylor amp Francis
Enderby P and John A 1997 Therapy outcome measures speech-language
pathology technical manual London Singular
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1992 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder linguistic
and personality results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35
1114ndash25
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1994 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder educational
and occupational results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37
1341ndash53
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 213
Flipsen P Shriberg L D Weismer G Karlsson H B and McSweeny J L
2001 Acoustic phenotypes for speech-genetics studies reference data for
residual =3= distortions Clinical Linguistics and Phonetics 15 603ndash30
Gibbon F E 1999 Undifferentiated lingual gestures in children with
articulation=phonological disorders Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing Research 42 382ndash97
Gierut J A 1998 Treatment efficacy functional phonological disorders in
children Journal of Speech Language Hearing Research 41 S85ndash100
Gierut J A Morrisette M L Hughes M T and Rowland S 1996
Phonological treatment efficacy and developmental norms Language
Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 27 215ndash30
Gillon G T 2000 The efficacy of phonological awareness intervention for
children with spoken language impairment Language Speech and Hear-
ing Services in Schools 31 126ndash41
Goldman R and Fristoe M 1986 Goldman Fristoe Test of Articulation
Revised Circle Pines MN American Guidance Service
Green B and Kostogriz A 2002 Learning difficulties and the new literacy
studies a socially critical perspective In Soler J Wearmouth J and
Reid G editors Contextualising difficulties in literacy development
exploring politics culture ethnicity and ethics Milton Keynes The Open
University
Griffin S Wilson L Clark L and McLeod S 2001 Speech pathology
applications of automatic speech recognition technology In Wilson L
and Hewat S editors Proceedings of the 2001 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
293ndash99
Golding-Kushner K 1995 Treatment of articulation and resonance disorders
associated with cleft palate and VPI In Shprintzen R and Bardach J
editors Cleft palate speech management a multidisciplinary approach
St Louis Mosby 327ndash63
Harasty J and Reed V A 1994 The prevalence of speech and language
impairment in two Sydney metropolitan schools Australian Journal of
Human Communication Disorders 22 1ndash23
Harding A and Grunwell P 1998 Active versus passive cleft-type speech
characteristics International Journal of Language and Communication
Disorders 33 329ndash52
Hersh D 1999 Impairment to empowerment social model theory and
aphasia therapy In McLeod S and McAllister L editors Proceedings
of the 1999 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 125ndash30
214 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Hodge M 1983 Assessment and treatment of a child with a developmental
speech disorder a biological behavioural perspective Seminars in Speech
and Language 14 128ndash41
Hodson B W 1994 Helping individuals become intelligible literate and
articulate the role of phonology Topics in Language Disorders 14 1ndash16
Hodson B W and Paden E P 1981 Phonological processes which
characterize unintelligible and intelligible speech in early childhood
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 46 369ndash73
James D van Doorn J and McLeod S 2002 Segment production in mono-
di- and polysyllabic words in children aged 3ndash7 years In Windsor F
Kelly L and Hewlett N editors Themes in Clinical Phonetics and
Linguistics Hillsdale NJ Lawrence Erlbaum 287ndash98
Jordan L and Kaiser W 1996 Aphasia a social approach London
Chapman and Hall
Kamhi A G 2000 Practice makes perfect the incompatibility of practicing
speech and meaningful communication Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 31 182ndash85
Kent R D Miolo G and Bloedel S 1994 The intelligibility of childrenrsquos
speech a review of evaluation procedures American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 3 81ndash95
Koegel L K Koegel R L and Costello-Ingham J 1986 Programming
rapid generalization of correct articulation through self-monitoring proce-
dures Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 24ndash32
Kovarsky D 2001 Ruminating on impairments-based assessment and inter-
vention Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 59ndash62
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1992 Intelligibility assessment in
developmental phonological disorders accuracy of caregiver gloss
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35 1095ndash1104
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1993 Speech normalization in develop-
mental phonological disorders a retrospective study of capability-focus
theory Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 24 10ndash18
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1998 The capability-focus treatment
framework for child speech disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 7 27ndash38
Lai C S L Fisher S E Hurst J A Vargha-Khadem F and Monaco A P
2001 A forkhead-domain gene is mutated in severe speech and language
disorder Nature 413 519ndash23
Larrivee L S and Catts H W 1999 Early reading achievement in children
with expressive phonological disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 8 118ndash28
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 215
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
the nose mouth pharynx and larynx Body functions describes lsquothe physiolo-
gical functions of body systemsrsquo (WHO 2001 10) Included in the category of
body functions are lsquovoice functionsrsquo such as production and quality of voice
lsquospeech functionsrsquo including the articulation of phonemes and lsquomental func-
tions of languagersquo including expression of spoken language Activity is lsquothe
execution of a task by an individualrsquo (WHO 2001 10) and participation
describes the involvement in a life situation Thus under the heading of activity
and participation communication in its many forms is included as an entire
chapter within the ICF (chapter 3) Some of the highlighted aspects of
communication include lsquoCommunicating with ndash receiving ndash spoken messagesrsquo
lsquospeakingrsquo and lsquoconversationrsquo Other relevant categories of activity and
participation include learning and applying knowledge (chapter 1) such as
lsquolearning to readrsquo and lsquolearning to writersquo Additionally activities and participa-
tion include interpersonal interactions and relationships (chapter 7) major life
areas such as preschool education (chapter 8) and community social and civic
life (chapter 9) Finally the term disability lsquoserves as an umbrella term for
impairments activity limitation and participation restrictionsrsquo (WHO 2001 3)
Part 2 of the ICF is titled lsquoContextual factorsrsquo and includes environmental and
personal factors (see Table 1) Environmental factors lsquomake up the physical
social and attitudinal environment in which people live and conduct their livesrsquo
(WHO 2001 10) and can be facilitators or barriers Environmental factors
relevant to communication include products and technology (chapter 1) support
and relationships (chapter 3) attitudes (chapter 4) services systems and policies
(chapter 5) Personal factors include the attributes of the person and the internal
influences on functioning and disability Due to the individuality of this WHO
component personal factors are not specified as chapters within the ICF
Within the field of communication disorders there has been some use of the
ICF (and its predecessors) as a meta-theory for practice (for example American
Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Threats 2000 2001 Worrall
1999 2001) The application of the ICF (and its predecessors) has particularly
occurred within the context of SLTs working with adults who have dementia
experienced a stroke or acquired brain injury (for example Bourgeois 1998
Hersh 1999 Worrall 1999) with adults who have voice disorders (Ma and Yiu
2001a 2001b) including those who use alaryngeal speech (Eadie 2003) There
have also been some descriptions of the use of a social model of interaction in
speech and language practice with children (for example Duchan 2001a 2001b
Kovarsky 2001 Locke 2000) but limited direct application of the ICF to the
consideration of the speech of children The exception is the excellent work by
Hodge (1983) who applied the original 1980 version of the WHO model to
assessment and intervention practices with a child who had a speech impairment
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 203
In order to explore the application of the ICF to child language teaching and
therapy each of the parts and components of the ICF will be discussed with
relation to childrenrsquos speech production Table 1 lists each of the parts and
components of the ICF and their application to a speech and language assess-
ment in order to inform goal setting Many of these assessments and analyses are
typically included in traditional SLT assessments (see the forum led by Williams
2002) For example oromuscular examinations and audiological assessments are
conducted to assess body structures An SLT assessment of speech sounds and
phonology are conducted to assess body functions However it is less likely that
SLTs consider activity and participation contextual and personal factors
Conversely teachers frequently consider activity and participation of children
Possible methods of evaluating activity and participation include an intelligibility
assessment or by gathering qualitative descriptions of successes and difficulties
in participation in the family school and social situations Determination of
parental wider family and school involvement support attitudes and expecta-
tions comprises evaluation of contextual factors Personal factors can include the
age of the child self-confidence motivation attention cognitive ability beliefs
learning style and experience with communication failure on intervention
Although there is close interrelationship between each of these areas goals
will be suggested for parts and components
Goals targeting functioning and disability
Body structures and functions
Children who are described as having a communication impairment of
(known) origin usually have impaired body structure(s) Impairment of body
structures can include a cleft palate anklyglossia or a malformed cochlea
among other examples Impairment-based goal setting for children with
impaired body structures often includes medical intervention such as surgical
repair of a cleft or a cochlear implant With the advancement of medical
science there is the potential for a decreasing need for extensive speech
intervention for people with impairment of body structures For example
Golding-Kushner (1995 327) has written that lsquoApproximately 80 of
children born with nonsyndromic cleft palate who undergo palate repair by
18 months of age develop speech free from compensatory errors without any
type of therapeutic interventionrsquo A social goal addressing impairment of body
structures could aim to promote societal acceptance of diversity of the
appearance of people For example a popular television show could include
a child who has a craniofacial anomaly in order to promote inclusiveness
204 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Impaired body structure can result in impaired body function For example
a person with a cleft palate may have nasal emission during speech An
impairment-based speech goal could therefore include reduction of audible
nasal emission during the production of high-pressure consonants (stops
fricatives and affricates) (Harding and Grunwell 1998) This may have the
social advantage of being more intelligible and less different or obtrusive
Other more subtle impairments in body structure and function that
influence speech production can be detected via oromusculature examination
(for example Ozanne 1992 Robbins and Klee 1987) with examples of
impaired body structure including tongue-tie and examples of body function
impairment include difficulty on diadochokinesis (rapid speech movement)
tasks Debate exists as to the impact on speech production as a result of these
more subtle impairments of body structure and function Similarly strong
debate surrounds the use of oral-motor exercises to facilitate speech sound
acquisition in children with speech impairment Lof (2003 9) provides a
summary of this debate and concludes the lsquothere is little if any theoretical
philosophical or clinical justification for using oral motor exercises to improve
speech sound production skillsrsquo
Impairments of body structure and function relating to hearing can be
detected via audiological examination such as tympanometry An example of
impairment of body structure is otitis media (glue ear) while an example of
body function impairment is hearing loss Controversy surrounds the inter-
relationship between otitis media (impaired body structure) and speech
perception=production (body function) Shriberg et al (2000a 2000b) has
altered the debate about whether or not otitis media is the cause of speech
impairment to the notion that there is increased risk of speech impairment as a
result of occurrences of otitis media However Campbell et al (2003 353)
found that lsquopersistent otitis media in the first three years of life did not
significantly increase the risk of speech delay after controlling for relevant
covariatesrsquo A social intervention relating to aural body structure and function
differences is the Healthy Little Ears project a health promotion project with
children in Australia (Mid Western Area Health Service 1999) Within this
programme children are encouraged to blow their nose each day to increase
functioning of the eustachian tube and decrease the occurrence of otitis
media
Genetics research has opened new areas of knowledge of impairment at the
micro level of body structure It may be the case that genetic abnormality may
account for children exhibiting impaired body function but previously thought
of as having intact body structures For example Lai et al (2001) described the
FOXP2 gene chromosome 7 as relating to speech apraxia Flipsen et al (2001)
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 205
have described acoustic markers that are indicative for genetic studies of
speech impairment The influence of these genetic breakthroughs on goal
setting in speech intervention may include discussion of familial histories
(for example Lewis et al 1989 Lewis and Freebairn 1993) and genetic
counselling Early intervention opportunities may be made for younger family
members of the child referred for speech intervention Early identification
can also lead to intervention opportunities to support academic success
particularly with respect to reading and spelling (Lewis et al 2000)
To date the majority of children who are seen by SLTs have communication
impairments of unknown origin (Shriberg et al 1986) indicating that their
body structure is considered to be intact These children have difficulty with
body functions such as the production of speech sounds Traditional SLT
measures of the speech function of these children have included the array of
articulation=phonology tests such as the Edinburgh Articulation Test (Anthony
et al 1971) and the Computerized Articulation and Phonology Evaluation
System (CAPES) (Masterson and Bernhardt 2002) The range of speech
analyses includes phonological analyses [for example Profile of Phonology
(PROPHthorn ) Long et al 2002] nonlinear analyses (Bernhardt and Stemberger
2000) and psycholinguistic analyses (Stackhouse and Wells 1993) Addition-
ally objective measures including acoustic (for example spectrographic) and
physiological (for example electropalatographic Gibbon 1999) tools are
enabling more accurate description of speech (Ball et al 2001) Children
with speech impairments may receive assessment reports concluding with
impairment-based goals such as to increase the percentage of consonants
correct (PCC) decrease the occurrence of various phonological processes or to
produce a list of phonemes expected but not produced correctly by the child
For children with impaired speech function there has been extensive debate
among SLTs regarding appropriate intervention goals Two dichotomous
approaches to goal selection have been proposed First the most knowledge
method (also called the traditional or developmental approach) and second the
least knowledge method (nontraditional nondevelopmental approach) (Bleile
1995) For the most knowledge method intervention goals differ minimally
from the sounds the child already produces (Elbert and Gierut 1986) That is
sounds or phonological processes are selected as intervention goals because
they are earlier developing stimulable and produced correctly in particular
contextual environments (Bernthal and Bankson 1998) In contrast in the least
knowledge method lsquo treatment targets differ from the childrsquos existing abilities
by multiple featuresrsquo (Elbert and Gierut 1986) Therefore sounds or processes
are selected because they are nonstimulable phonetically more complex have
phonologically marked properties reflect least phonological knowledge as
206 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
categorized by inventory constraints (with respect to phonemes) and are later
acquired (Gierut et al 1996) Gierut (1998) provides evidence that treatment
goals are achieved efficiently if children are taught sounds or sound pairs that
are not in a childrsquos pretreatment repertoire and developmentally later-acquired
sounds that are phonetically more complex acoustically undifferentiated and
nonstimulable that is following the least knowledge approach In contrast
Rvachew and Nowak (2001) compared the most knowledge (traditional) and
least knowledge (nontraditional) approaches for 48 children with moderate to
severe phonological disorders The study had four major findings children
made more progress toward acquiring target sounds through a traditional
approach the approaches did not differ in generalization from treated to
untreated sounds children liked both approaches parents were more favourable
to the traditional approach These authors have debated their different inter-
pretations of the outcomes of selecting the traditional and nontraditional
approaches in Morrisette and Gierut (2003) and Rvachew and Nowak (2003)
However Williams (2003) adds another dimension to this debate in her helpful
overview and discussion of five approaches to target selection As well as
the traditional and nontraditional approaches she includes markedness the
systemic function of sounds within a given sound system contrastive sounds
and lexical properties of treatment words She concludes by advocating more
research that addresses the impact of additive relationships between these
different approaches
Some questions following on from these approaches to impairment-based
goal selection by SLTs include the following Should treatment goals include
sounds for which the child is not stimulable (Powell 2003) Do children learn
sounds that are stimulable without having to be taught (Elbert and Gierut
1986 Powell and Miccio 1996) Should treatment goals target later-acquired
sounds Does teaching later-acquired sounds facilitate linguistic generaliza-
tion more readily than teaching earlier-acquired ones (Gierut 1998 Rvachew
and Nowak 2001) Although these questions need to be asked it is not
possible to predict with certainty what the most appropriate goal is for an
individual child In order to appropriately answer questions such as these
SLTs need to add to their impairment-based approach focusing on body
structures and functions The ICF provides additional areas of consideration to
enable appropriate goal setting for each individual
Activities and participation
The ICF model specifies consideration of activities and participation in
facilitating health and well-being Some that have relevance to children with
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 207
speech impairment include speaking conversation learning and applying
knowledge interpersonal interactions and relationships community social
and civic life Each of these will be addressed with relation to children with
speech impairment
Within the last decade SLTs have appropriated measures of activity and
participation that consider (to some extent) the social impact of speaking and
conversation One measure of activity that has been formalized as an assess-
ment practice is the level of intelligibility (Bleile 1995 Kent et al 1994
Kwiatkowski and Shriberg 1992) The Childrenrsquos Speech Intelligibility
Measure (Wilcox and Morris 1999) is one commercially available sampling
tool to quantify the extent of intelligibility of individual childrenrsquos speech by
untrained listeners There are few examples of ways in which SLTs consider
participation within speaking and conversation by children with speech
impairment One example is the Therapy Outcomes Measure (Enderby and
John 1997) which includes a specific subsection on childrenrsquos speech
Consideration of activities and participation also includes the influence of
the impairment on learning and applying knowledge With the high co-
occurrence of children with speech impairments having reading and spelling
difficulties (Larrivee and Catts 1999) it is essential that goals are developed
around the facilitation of academic skills (Hodson 1994) Intervention
targeting phonological awareness should accompany speech intervention
(Gillon 2000) Partnerships between teachers and SLTs are essential for
appropriate goal setting to facilitate successful oral and literate communicative
skills throughout the lives of these children
Further SLTs and teachers can consider interpersonal interactions and
relationships in their intervention planning for children with speech impair-
ment Pertinent social assessment practices may consist of a discussion with
the child his=her parents siblings friends grandparents and other significant
people to ascertain social goals and barriers interests and hopes (Duchan
2001a) Pretty (1995) suggested a number of goals congruent with a social
model for a four-year old girl with severe speech impairment The goals
focused on the interpersonal interactions and relationships with her family
teacher friends peers and peersrsquo parents For example the teacher and SLT
collaborated to promote communicative success at preschool including
strategies to repair communication breakdowns encouraging a group of her
peers to ask for repetition when they did not understand BJ or to ask BJ to
lsquoshow mersquo BJrsquos family were encouraged to look at her when she spoke to them
use all available cues (for example maintaining a diary of significant events
that she may want to communicate) and keep a list of BJrsquos pronunciations of
important words (for example the name of her best friend) These goals based
208 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
on activity and participation can readily be adapted for any child with a speech
impairment
Finally consideration of community social and civic life of children with
speech impairment is rarely discussed However there is scope for socially
based intervention goals to facilitate activity and participation in this context
Friends can be encouraged to spend time talking and babbling with a baby
who has a craniofacial anomaly in order to develop social interactions despite
the fact that the child may look different and have reduced time for social
interaction due to the extensive amount of time spent feeding Another
example of a social goal for people with a hearing impairment would consist
of public education to decrease background noise and to encourage people to
look at a person with a hearing impairment while talking with them
When considering activity and participation the ICF allows for comparison
between performance and capacity There may be a mismatch between a
childrsquos performance within their daily lives and their communicative capacity
on standardized speech assessment tools At times children are more capable
within the confines of a standardized assessment than they demonstrate within
the complex communicative demands of the classroom At other times
children exhibit a variety of compensatory strategies to minimize commu-
nicative difficulty that is evident on standardized assessment tasks Considera-
tion of performance and capacity is an important component within the
capability focus model described by Kwiatkowski and Shriberg (1993
1998) who have successfully tested this with hundreds of children who
have received speech intervention Even while undertaking standardized
assessment tools there may be a mismatch between performance on one
versus another demonstrating the mismatch between performance and capa-
city Some areas of difference include single word versus connected speech
(McLeod et al 1994 Morrison and Shriberg 1992) imitated versus sponta-
neous speech (Leonard et al 1978) stimulable versus nonstimulable sounds
(Powell and Miccio 1996) monosyllabic versus polysyllabic words (James et
al 2002) The difference between a childrsquos communicative performance and
capacity should be considered when developing appropriate goals
Contextual factors
Environmental factors
Some of the environmental factors mentioned by WHO that relate to children
with speech impairment include products and technology support and
relationships attitudes and services systems and policies
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 209
There is a burgeoning industry of products and technology utilizing speech-
activated devices for tasks such as computer operation word processing home
banking navigation and telephone directory assistance Intelligible speech is
essential for the use of speech-activated devices and can place restrictions on
the lives of adults who have residual speech impairments (Griffin et al 2001)
While children with speech impairment currently are not affected by this
technology if intelligible speech is not achieved by adulthood incorporation
within future society may be limited Further with the advances of technology
it is possible that speech-activated devices may be a common part of living for
children and adults alike
Probably the most important environmental factor relating to children with
speech impairment is support and relationships The incorporation of parental
support into the intervention practices is frequently a key to success (see
Bowen this issue) There is some research suggesting links between inter-
vention outcomes and environmental factors such as socioeconomic status
maternal IQ and maternal educational level (Chan et al 1998) Wider
networks of family friends and teachers are also important environmental
influences
Societal attitudes towards children adolescents and adults with speech
impairments are frequently negative (Crowe Hall 1991 Madison 1992
Silverman and Falk 1992) For example Silverman and Paulus (1989)
compared childrenrsquos attitudes towards a child who uses=w=for=r=with a typical
speaker The child with the mild speech impairment was considered to be less
talkative and hear less well than his=her peers dysfluent unpleasant to listen
to soft boring dull more tense nervous afraid handicapped isolated
uncomfortable Further Anderson and Antonak (1992) found that social
acceptance of an actor with a mild speech sound impairment was less
positive than the same actor demonstrating a physical disability Research
by Felsenfeld et al (1992) adds another dimension people with speech
impairment were found to be less extroverted and socialized with fewer
people than people with typical speech development Clearly people with
speech impairment may be compromised by societal attitudes necessitating
goals directed towards society as well as working at the impairment level
The services systems and policies relating to individual children are as
varied as each individual and can influence the type of schooling the child
receives the type and amount of support the child receives at school whether
a child is eligible for SLT intervention and so forth Political factors can affect
the actuality of intervention for individual clients For example in some health
sectors within the USA the politicization of health care dictates the number of
SLT sessions a person with a particular impairment can receive Philosophical
210 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
attitudes toward the labelling of a child with a speech or language impairment
can influence the type of goals developed for a child (Christensen and Baker
2002 Green and Kostogriz 2002) For example McDermott (1993 272) has
argued that lsquothere is no such thing as LD [Learning Disability] only a social
practice of displaying noticing documenting remediating and explaining itrsquo
McLeod (2003) described the distinction between the use of the terms
lsquonormalrsquo and lsquotypicalrsquo and SLTsrsquo role in the categorization of children along
the normalndashabnormal divide Simmons-Mackie (2001) described differing
clinical assumptions leading to differing intervention approaches A childrsquos
experiences of receiving intervention from different people with differing
clinical assumptions is documented by Kovarsky (2001) Thus services
systems and policies can play a role in goal setting for children with speech
impairment
Personal factors
Attached to every lsquospeech impairmentrsquo is a real child (Bleile 1991) His or her
unique makeup must be considered within his=her cultural milieu in order to
determine the most appropriate intervention goals The ICF (WHO 2001 8)
recognizes the lsquolarge social and cultural variancersquo including gender age other
health conditions coping style social background education profession past
experience and character style Currently research into typically developing
children has demonstrated the wide range of individual differences (for
example McLeod et al 2001) For children with speech impairment there
are some case studies documenting the effect of personal factors on appro-
priate goal setting and intervention outcomes For example Kamhi (2000)
describes the progress of phonological intervention with his daughter Franne
Frannersquos lsquostubbornnessrsquo and desire to communicate with her parents led to
delineation between speech sound practice with her SLT and meaningful
communication with her parents He writes lsquoFrannersquos reluctance to practise
speech sounds was her way to let us know that we should focus on what
she said when she spoke rather than on how she said itrsquo (Kamhi 2000 183)
One important and documented factor to consider in the selection of speech
goals is the childrsquos personal ability to evaluate his=her speech Self-evaluation
occurs when the child judges the accuracy of his=her response prior to explicit
feedback from the clinician (cf Koegel et al 1986) lsquoSelf-evaluation appears
to be a central concept within diverse theoretical views of normal speech
development and within approaches to and explications of successful
interventionrsquo (Shriberg and Kwiatkowski 1987 154) Thus SLTs can incor-
porate self-evaluation within the intervention goals
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 211
Conclusion What goals are appropriate
It can be argued that the ultimate goal of speech intervention is to bring about
correct production of speech sounds resulting in intelligible conversational
speech within a childrsquos milieu (cf Kamhi 2000 Powell 1991) However
other similarly important goals may be to enhance a childrsquos participation in
social interaction to increase self-esteem or to decrease negative societal
attitudes towards people with speech impairment The ICF is a meta-theory
that allows for consideration of all these possibilities and is enhanced by
collaboration between SLTs and teachers A summary of possible goals
relating to the ICF is provided in Table 1 The most important outcome of
the present discussion is to reiterate that every child is unique requiring a
different approach to best meet their needs (Lowe 1994) Thus it is important
to consider all the factors before making a decision then to devise goals in
consultation and monitor progress (see Baker and McLeod this issue)
Continual revision and consultation will result in appropriate outcomes for
individual children as well as society
References
American Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Scope of practice in
speech-language pathology Rockville MD ASHA
Anderson R J and Antonak R F 1992 The influence of attitudes and
contact on reactions to persons with physical and speech disabilities
Rehabilitation Counselling Bulletin 35 240ndash47
Anthony A Bogle D Ingram T T S and McIsaac M W 1971 The
Edinburgh articulation test Edinburgh E and S Livingstone
Baker E and McLeod S 2004 Evidence-based management of children with
phonological impairment of unknown origin Child Language Teaching
and Therapy 20 261ndash85
Ball M J Gracco V and Stone M 2001 A comparison of imaging
techniques for the investigation of normal and disordered speech produc-
tion Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 313ndash24
Bernhardt B H and Stemberger J P 2000 Workbook in nonlinear phonology
for clinical application Austin TX ProEd
Bernthal J E and Bankson N W 1998 Articulation and phonological
disorders 4th edition Boston Allyn and Bacon
Bleile K M 1991 Individual differences In Bleile K M editor Child
phonology a book of exercises for students San Diego CA Singular 57ndash71
212 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Bleile K M 1995 Manual of articulation and phonological disorders San
Diego CA Singular
Bourgeois M S 1998 Functional outcome assessment of adults with
dementia Seminars in Speech and Hearing 19 261ndash75
Bowen C 2004 Child Language Teaching and Therapy 20 245ndash60
Campbell T F Dollaghan C A Rockette H E Paradise J L Feldman H
M Shriberg L D Sabo D L and Kurs-Lasky M 2003 Risk factors
for speech delay of unknown origin in 3-year-old children Child
Development 74 346ndash57
Chan A McAllister L and Wilson L 1998 An investigation of the agendash
MLU relationship and factors which predict MLU in two and three year
old Australian children Asia Pacific Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing 3 97ndash108
Christensen C A and Baker C D 2002 Pedagogy observation and
the construction of learning disability Pedagogy Culture and Society
10 73ndash93
Crowe Hall B J 1991 Attitudes of fourth and sixth graders toward peers with
mild articulation disorders Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 22 334ndash40
Duchan J F 2001a Impairment and social views of speech-language
pathology clinical practices re-examined Advances in Speech-Language
Pathology 3 37ndash46
Duchan J F 2001b Social and impairment approaches viewed in a forest and
in the shadows of a city street Advances in Speech-Language Pathology
3 73ndash79
Eadie T L 2003 The ICF A proposed framework for comprehensive
rehabilitation of individuals who use alaryngeal speech American
Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 12 189ndash97
Elbert M and Gierut J A 1986 Handbook of clinical phonology
approaches to assessment and treatment London Taylor amp Francis
Enderby P and John A 1997 Therapy outcome measures speech-language
pathology technical manual London Singular
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1992 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder linguistic
and personality results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35
1114ndash25
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1994 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder educational
and occupational results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37
1341ndash53
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 213
Flipsen P Shriberg L D Weismer G Karlsson H B and McSweeny J L
2001 Acoustic phenotypes for speech-genetics studies reference data for
residual =3= distortions Clinical Linguistics and Phonetics 15 603ndash30
Gibbon F E 1999 Undifferentiated lingual gestures in children with
articulation=phonological disorders Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing Research 42 382ndash97
Gierut J A 1998 Treatment efficacy functional phonological disorders in
children Journal of Speech Language Hearing Research 41 S85ndash100
Gierut J A Morrisette M L Hughes M T and Rowland S 1996
Phonological treatment efficacy and developmental norms Language
Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 27 215ndash30
Gillon G T 2000 The efficacy of phonological awareness intervention for
children with spoken language impairment Language Speech and Hear-
ing Services in Schools 31 126ndash41
Goldman R and Fristoe M 1986 Goldman Fristoe Test of Articulation
Revised Circle Pines MN American Guidance Service
Green B and Kostogriz A 2002 Learning difficulties and the new literacy
studies a socially critical perspective In Soler J Wearmouth J and
Reid G editors Contextualising difficulties in literacy development
exploring politics culture ethnicity and ethics Milton Keynes The Open
University
Griffin S Wilson L Clark L and McLeod S 2001 Speech pathology
applications of automatic speech recognition technology In Wilson L
and Hewat S editors Proceedings of the 2001 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
293ndash99
Golding-Kushner K 1995 Treatment of articulation and resonance disorders
associated with cleft palate and VPI In Shprintzen R and Bardach J
editors Cleft palate speech management a multidisciplinary approach
St Louis Mosby 327ndash63
Harasty J and Reed V A 1994 The prevalence of speech and language
impairment in two Sydney metropolitan schools Australian Journal of
Human Communication Disorders 22 1ndash23
Harding A and Grunwell P 1998 Active versus passive cleft-type speech
characteristics International Journal of Language and Communication
Disorders 33 329ndash52
Hersh D 1999 Impairment to empowerment social model theory and
aphasia therapy In McLeod S and McAllister L editors Proceedings
of the 1999 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 125ndash30
214 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Hodge M 1983 Assessment and treatment of a child with a developmental
speech disorder a biological behavioural perspective Seminars in Speech
and Language 14 128ndash41
Hodson B W 1994 Helping individuals become intelligible literate and
articulate the role of phonology Topics in Language Disorders 14 1ndash16
Hodson B W and Paden E P 1981 Phonological processes which
characterize unintelligible and intelligible speech in early childhood
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 46 369ndash73
James D van Doorn J and McLeod S 2002 Segment production in mono-
di- and polysyllabic words in children aged 3ndash7 years In Windsor F
Kelly L and Hewlett N editors Themes in Clinical Phonetics and
Linguistics Hillsdale NJ Lawrence Erlbaum 287ndash98
Jordan L and Kaiser W 1996 Aphasia a social approach London
Chapman and Hall
Kamhi A G 2000 Practice makes perfect the incompatibility of practicing
speech and meaningful communication Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 31 182ndash85
Kent R D Miolo G and Bloedel S 1994 The intelligibility of childrenrsquos
speech a review of evaluation procedures American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 3 81ndash95
Koegel L K Koegel R L and Costello-Ingham J 1986 Programming
rapid generalization of correct articulation through self-monitoring proce-
dures Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 24ndash32
Kovarsky D 2001 Ruminating on impairments-based assessment and inter-
vention Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 59ndash62
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1992 Intelligibility assessment in
developmental phonological disorders accuracy of caregiver gloss
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35 1095ndash1104
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1993 Speech normalization in develop-
mental phonological disorders a retrospective study of capability-focus
theory Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 24 10ndash18
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1998 The capability-focus treatment
framework for child speech disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 7 27ndash38
Lai C S L Fisher S E Hurst J A Vargha-Khadem F and Monaco A P
2001 A forkhead-domain gene is mutated in severe speech and language
disorder Nature 413 519ndash23
Larrivee L S and Catts H W 1999 Early reading achievement in children
with expressive phonological disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 8 118ndash28
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 215
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
In order to explore the application of the ICF to child language teaching and
therapy each of the parts and components of the ICF will be discussed with
relation to childrenrsquos speech production Table 1 lists each of the parts and
components of the ICF and their application to a speech and language assess-
ment in order to inform goal setting Many of these assessments and analyses are
typically included in traditional SLT assessments (see the forum led by Williams
2002) For example oromuscular examinations and audiological assessments are
conducted to assess body structures An SLT assessment of speech sounds and
phonology are conducted to assess body functions However it is less likely that
SLTs consider activity and participation contextual and personal factors
Conversely teachers frequently consider activity and participation of children
Possible methods of evaluating activity and participation include an intelligibility
assessment or by gathering qualitative descriptions of successes and difficulties
in participation in the family school and social situations Determination of
parental wider family and school involvement support attitudes and expecta-
tions comprises evaluation of contextual factors Personal factors can include the
age of the child self-confidence motivation attention cognitive ability beliefs
learning style and experience with communication failure on intervention
Although there is close interrelationship between each of these areas goals
will be suggested for parts and components
Goals targeting functioning and disability
Body structures and functions
Children who are described as having a communication impairment of
(known) origin usually have impaired body structure(s) Impairment of body
structures can include a cleft palate anklyglossia or a malformed cochlea
among other examples Impairment-based goal setting for children with
impaired body structures often includes medical intervention such as surgical
repair of a cleft or a cochlear implant With the advancement of medical
science there is the potential for a decreasing need for extensive speech
intervention for people with impairment of body structures For example
Golding-Kushner (1995 327) has written that lsquoApproximately 80 of
children born with nonsyndromic cleft palate who undergo palate repair by
18 months of age develop speech free from compensatory errors without any
type of therapeutic interventionrsquo A social goal addressing impairment of body
structures could aim to promote societal acceptance of diversity of the
appearance of people For example a popular television show could include
a child who has a craniofacial anomaly in order to promote inclusiveness
204 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Impaired body structure can result in impaired body function For example
a person with a cleft palate may have nasal emission during speech An
impairment-based speech goal could therefore include reduction of audible
nasal emission during the production of high-pressure consonants (stops
fricatives and affricates) (Harding and Grunwell 1998) This may have the
social advantage of being more intelligible and less different or obtrusive
Other more subtle impairments in body structure and function that
influence speech production can be detected via oromusculature examination
(for example Ozanne 1992 Robbins and Klee 1987) with examples of
impaired body structure including tongue-tie and examples of body function
impairment include difficulty on diadochokinesis (rapid speech movement)
tasks Debate exists as to the impact on speech production as a result of these
more subtle impairments of body structure and function Similarly strong
debate surrounds the use of oral-motor exercises to facilitate speech sound
acquisition in children with speech impairment Lof (2003 9) provides a
summary of this debate and concludes the lsquothere is little if any theoretical
philosophical or clinical justification for using oral motor exercises to improve
speech sound production skillsrsquo
Impairments of body structure and function relating to hearing can be
detected via audiological examination such as tympanometry An example of
impairment of body structure is otitis media (glue ear) while an example of
body function impairment is hearing loss Controversy surrounds the inter-
relationship between otitis media (impaired body structure) and speech
perception=production (body function) Shriberg et al (2000a 2000b) has
altered the debate about whether or not otitis media is the cause of speech
impairment to the notion that there is increased risk of speech impairment as a
result of occurrences of otitis media However Campbell et al (2003 353)
found that lsquopersistent otitis media in the first three years of life did not
significantly increase the risk of speech delay after controlling for relevant
covariatesrsquo A social intervention relating to aural body structure and function
differences is the Healthy Little Ears project a health promotion project with
children in Australia (Mid Western Area Health Service 1999) Within this
programme children are encouraged to blow their nose each day to increase
functioning of the eustachian tube and decrease the occurrence of otitis
media
Genetics research has opened new areas of knowledge of impairment at the
micro level of body structure It may be the case that genetic abnormality may
account for children exhibiting impaired body function but previously thought
of as having intact body structures For example Lai et al (2001) described the
FOXP2 gene chromosome 7 as relating to speech apraxia Flipsen et al (2001)
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 205
have described acoustic markers that are indicative for genetic studies of
speech impairment The influence of these genetic breakthroughs on goal
setting in speech intervention may include discussion of familial histories
(for example Lewis et al 1989 Lewis and Freebairn 1993) and genetic
counselling Early intervention opportunities may be made for younger family
members of the child referred for speech intervention Early identification
can also lead to intervention opportunities to support academic success
particularly with respect to reading and spelling (Lewis et al 2000)
To date the majority of children who are seen by SLTs have communication
impairments of unknown origin (Shriberg et al 1986) indicating that their
body structure is considered to be intact These children have difficulty with
body functions such as the production of speech sounds Traditional SLT
measures of the speech function of these children have included the array of
articulation=phonology tests such as the Edinburgh Articulation Test (Anthony
et al 1971) and the Computerized Articulation and Phonology Evaluation
System (CAPES) (Masterson and Bernhardt 2002) The range of speech
analyses includes phonological analyses [for example Profile of Phonology
(PROPHthorn ) Long et al 2002] nonlinear analyses (Bernhardt and Stemberger
2000) and psycholinguistic analyses (Stackhouse and Wells 1993) Addition-
ally objective measures including acoustic (for example spectrographic) and
physiological (for example electropalatographic Gibbon 1999) tools are
enabling more accurate description of speech (Ball et al 2001) Children
with speech impairments may receive assessment reports concluding with
impairment-based goals such as to increase the percentage of consonants
correct (PCC) decrease the occurrence of various phonological processes or to
produce a list of phonemes expected but not produced correctly by the child
For children with impaired speech function there has been extensive debate
among SLTs regarding appropriate intervention goals Two dichotomous
approaches to goal selection have been proposed First the most knowledge
method (also called the traditional or developmental approach) and second the
least knowledge method (nontraditional nondevelopmental approach) (Bleile
1995) For the most knowledge method intervention goals differ minimally
from the sounds the child already produces (Elbert and Gierut 1986) That is
sounds or phonological processes are selected as intervention goals because
they are earlier developing stimulable and produced correctly in particular
contextual environments (Bernthal and Bankson 1998) In contrast in the least
knowledge method lsquo treatment targets differ from the childrsquos existing abilities
by multiple featuresrsquo (Elbert and Gierut 1986) Therefore sounds or processes
are selected because they are nonstimulable phonetically more complex have
phonologically marked properties reflect least phonological knowledge as
206 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
categorized by inventory constraints (with respect to phonemes) and are later
acquired (Gierut et al 1996) Gierut (1998) provides evidence that treatment
goals are achieved efficiently if children are taught sounds or sound pairs that
are not in a childrsquos pretreatment repertoire and developmentally later-acquired
sounds that are phonetically more complex acoustically undifferentiated and
nonstimulable that is following the least knowledge approach In contrast
Rvachew and Nowak (2001) compared the most knowledge (traditional) and
least knowledge (nontraditional) approaches for 48 children with moderate to
severe phonological disorders The study had four major findings children
made more progress toward acquiring target sounds through a traditional
approach the approaches did not differ in generalization from treated to
untreated sounds children liked both approaches parents were more favourable
to the traditional approach These authors have debated their different inter-
pretations of the outcomes of selecting the traditional and nontraditional
approaches in Morrisette and Gierut (2003) and Rvachew and Nowak (2003)
However Williams (2003) adds another dimension to this debate in her helpful
overview and discussion of five approaches to target selection As well as
the traditional and nontraditional approaches she includes markedness the
systemic function of sounds within a given sound system contrastive sounds
and lexical properties of treatment words She concludes by advocating more
research that addresses the impact of additive relationships between these
different approaches
Some questions following on from these approaches to impairment-based
goal selection by SLTs include the following Should treatment goals include
sounds for which the child is not stimulable (Powell 2003) Do children learn
sounds that are stimulable without having to be taught (Elbert and Gierut
1986 Powell and Miccio 1996) Should treatment goals target later-acquired
sounds Does teaching later-acquired sounds facilitate linguistic generaliza-
tion more readily than teaching earlier-acquired ones (Gierut 1998 Rvachew
and Nowak 2001) Although these questions need to be asked it is not
possible to predict with certainty what the most appropriate goal is for an
individual child In order to appropriately answer questions such as these
SLTs need to add to their impairment-based approach focusing on body
structures and functions The ICF provides additional areas of consideration to
enable appropriate goal setting for each individual
Activities and participation
The ICF model specifies consideration of activities and participation in
facilitating health and well-being Some that have relevance to children with
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 207
speech impairment include speaking conversation learning and applying
knowledge interpersonal interactions and relationships community social
and civic life Each of these will be addressed with relation to children with
speech impairment
Within the last decade SLTs have appropriated measures of activity and
participation that consider (to some extent) the social impact of speaking and
conversation One measure of activity that has been formalized as an assess-
ment practice is the level of intelligibility (Bleile 1995 Kent et al 1994
Kwiatkowski and Shriberg 1992) The Childrenrsquos Speech Intelligibility
Measure (Wilcox and Morris 1999) is one commercially available sampling
tool to quantify the extent of intelligibility of individual childrenrsquos speech by
untrained listeners There are few examples of ways in which SLTs consider
participation within speaking and conversation by children with speech
impairment One example is the Therapy Outcomes Measure (Enderby and
John 1997) which includes a specific subsection on childrenrsquos speech
Consideration of activities and participation also includes the influence of
the impairment on learning and applying knowledge With the high co-
occurrence of children with speech impairments having reading and spelling
difficulties (Larrivee and Catts 1999) it is essential that goals are developed
around the facilitation of academic skills (Hodson 1994) Intervention
targeting phonological awareness should accompany speech intervention
(Gillon 2000) Partnerships between teachers and SLTs are essential for
appropriate goal setting to facilitate successful oral and literate communicative
skills throughout the lives of these children
Further SLTs and teachers can consider interpersonal interactions and
relationships in their intervention planning for children with speech impair-
ment Pertinent social assessment practices may consist of a discussion with
the child his=her parents siblings friends grandparents and other significant
people to ascertain social goals and barriers interests and hopes (Duchan
2001a) Pretty (1995) suggested a number of goals congruent with a social
model for a four-year old girl with severe speech impairment The goals
focused on the interpersonal interactions and relationships with her family
teacher friends peers and peersrsquo parents For example the teacher and SLT
collaborated to promote communicative success at preschool including
strategies to repair communication breakdowns encouraging a group of her
peers to ask for repetition when they did not understand BJ or to ask BJ to
lsquoshow mersquo BJrsquos family were encouraged to look at her when she spoke to them
use all available cues (for example maintaining a diary of significant events
that she may want to communicate) and keep a list of BJrsquos pronunciations of
important words (for example the name of her best friend) These goals based
208 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
on activity and participation can readily be adapted for any child with a speech
impairment
Finally consideration of community social and civic life of children with
speech impairment is rarely discussed However there is scope for socially
based intervention goals to facilitate activity and participation in this context
Friends can be encouraged to spend time talking and babbling with a baby
who has a craniofacial anomaly in order to develop social interactions despite
the fact that the child may look different and have reduced time for social
interaction due to the extensive amount of time spent feeding Another
example of a social goal for people with a hearing impairment would consist
of public education to decrease background noise and to encourage people to
look at a person with a hearing impairment while talking with them
When considering activity and participation the ICF allows for comparison
between performance and capacity There may be a mismatch between a
childrsquos performance within their daily lives and their communicative capacity
on standardized speech assessment tools At times children are more capable
within the confines of a standardized assessment than they demonstrate within
the complex communicative demands of the classroom At other times
children exhibit a variety of compensatory strategies to minimize commu-
nicative difficulty that is evident on standardized assessment tasks Considera-
tion of performance and capacity is an important component within the
capability focus model described by Kwiatkowski and Shriberg (1993
1998) who have successfully tested this with hundreds of children who
have received speech intervention Even while undertaking standardized
assessment tools there may be a mismatch between performance on one
versus another demonstrating the mismatch between performance and capa-
city Some areas of difference include single word versus connected speech
(McLeod et al 1994 Morrison and Shriberg 1992) imitated versus sponta-
neous speech (Leonard et al 1978) stimulable versus nonstimulable sounds
(Powell and Miccio 1996) monosyllabic versus polysyllabic words (James et
al 2002) The difference between a childrsquos communicative performance and
capacity should be considered when developing appropriate goals
Contextual factors
Environmental factors
Some of the environmental factors mentioned by WHO that relate to children
with speech impairment include products and technology support and
relationships attitudes and services systems and policies
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 209
There is a burgeoning industry of products and technology utilizing speech-
activated devices for tasks such as computer operation word processing home
banking navigation and telephone directory assistance Intelligible speech is
essential for the use of speech-activated devices and can place restrictions on
the lives of adults who have residual speech impairments (Griffin et al 2001)
While children with speech impairment currently are not affected by this
technology if intelligible speech is not achieved by adulthood incorporation
within future society may be limited Further with the advances of technology
it is possible that speech-activated devices may be a common part of living for
children and adults alike
Probably the most important environmental factor relating to children with
speech impairment is support and relationships The incorporation of parental
support into the intervention practices is frequently a key to success (see
Bowen this issue) There is some research suggesting links between inter-
vention outcomes and environmental factors such as socioeconomic status
maternal IQ and maternal educational level (Chan et al 1998) Wider
networks of family friends and teachers are also important environmental
influences
Societal attitudes towards children adolescents and adults with speech
impairments are frequently negative (Crowe Hall 1991 Madison 1992
Silverman and Falk 1992) For example Silverman and Paulus (1989)
compared childrenrsquos attitudes towards a child who uses=w=for=r=with a typical
speaker The child with the mild speech impairment was considered to be less
talkative and hear less well than his=her peers dysfluent unpleasant to listen
to soft boring dull more tense nervous afraid handicapped isolated
uncomfortable Further Anderson and Antonak (1992) found that social
acceptance of an actor with a mild speech sound impairment was less
positive than the same actor demonstrating a physical disability Research
by Felsenfeld et al (1992) adds another dimension people with speech
impairment were found to be less extroverted and socialized with fewer
people than people with typical speech development Clearly people with
speech impairment may be compromised by societal attitudes necessitating
goals directed towards society as well as working at the impairment level
The services systems and policies relating to individual children are as
varied as each individual and can influence the type of schooling the child
receives the type and amount of support the child receives at school whether
a child is eligible for SLT intervention and so forth Political factors can affect
the actuality of intervention for individual clients For example in some health
sectors within the USA the politicization of health care dictates the number of
SLT sessions a person with a particular impairment can receive Philosophical
210 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
attitudes toward the labelling of a child with a speech or language impairment
can influence the type of goals developed for a child (Christensen and Baker
2002 Green and Kostogriz 2002) For example McDermott (1993 272) has
argued that lsquothere is no such thing as LD [Learning Disability] only a social
practice of displaying noticing documenting remediating and explaining itrsquo
McLeod (2003) described the distinction between the use of the terms
lsquonormalrsquo and lsquotypicalrsquo and SLTsrsquo role in the categorization of children along
the normalndashabnormal divide Simmons-Mackie (2001) described differing
clinical assumptions leading to differing intervention approaches A childrsquos
experiences of receiving intervention from different people with differing
clinical assumptions is documented by Kovarsky (2001) Thus services
systems and policies can play a role in goal setting for children with speech
impairment
Personal factors
Attached to every lsquospeech impairmentrsquo is a real child (Bleile 1991) His or her
unique makeup must be considered within his=her cultural milieu in order to
determine the most appropriate intervention goals The ICF (WHO 2001 8)
recognizes the lsquolarge social and cultural variancersquo including gender age other
health conditions coping style social background education profession past
experience and character style Currently research into typically developing
children has demonstrated the wide range of individual differences (for
example McLeod et al 2001) For children with speech impairment there
are some case studies documenting the effect of personal factors on appro-
priate goal setting and intervention outcomes For example Kamhi (2000)
describes the progress of phonological intervention with his daughter Franne
Frannersquos lsquostubbornnessrsquo and desire to communicate with her parents led to
delineation between speech sound practice with her SLT and meaningful
communication with her parents He writes lsquoFrannersquos reluctance to practise
speech sounds was her way to let us know that we should focus on what
she said when she spoke rather than on how she said itrsquo (Kamhi 2000 183)
One important and documented factor to consider in the selection of speech
goals is the childrsquos personal ability to evaluate his=her speech Self-evaluation
occurs when the child judges the accuracy of his=her response prior to explicit
feedback from the clinician (cf Koegel et al 1986) lsquoSelf-evaluation appears
to be a central concept within diverse theoretical views of normal speech
development and within approaches to and explications of successful
interventionrsquo (Shriberg and Kwiatkowski 1987 154) Thus SLTs can incor-
porate self-evaluation within the intervention goals
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 211
Conclusion What goals are appropriate
It can be argued that the ultimate goal of speech intervention is to bring about
correct production of speech sounds resulting in intelligible conversational
speech within a childrsquos milieu (cf Kamhi 2000 Powell 1991) However
other similarly important goals may be to enhance a childrsquos participation in
social interaction to increase self-esteem or to decrease negative societal
attitudes towards people with speech impairment The ICF is a meta-theory
that allows for consideration of all these possibilities and is enhanced by
collaboration between SLTs and teachers A summary of possible goals
relating to the ICF is provided in Table 1 The most important outcome of
the present discussion is to reiterate that every child is unique requiring a
different approach to best meet their needs (Lowe 1994) Thus it is important
to consider all the factors before making a decision then to devise goals in
consultation and monitor progress (see Baker and McLeod this issue)
Continual revision and consultation will result in appropriate outcomes for
individual children as well as society
References
American Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Scope of practice in
speech-language pathology Rockville MD ASHA
Anderson R J and Antonak R F 1992 The influence of attitudes and
contact on reactions to persons with physical and speech disabilities
Rehabilitation Counselling Bulletin 35 240ndash47
Anthony A Bogle D Ingram T T S and McIsaac M W 1971 The
Edinburgh articulation test Edinburgh E and S Livingstone
Baker E and McLeod S 2004 Evidence-based management of children with
phonological impairment of unknown origin Child Language Teaching
and Therapy 20 261ndash85
Ball M J Gracco V and Stone M 2001 A comparison of imaging
techniques for the investigation of normal and disordered speech produc-
tion Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 313ndash24
Bernhardt B H and Stemberger J P 2000 Workbook in nonlinear phonology
for clinical application Austin TX ProEd
Bernthal J E and Bankson N W 1998 Articulation and phonological
disorders 4th edition Boston Allyn and Bacon
Bleile K M 1991 Individual differences In Bleile K M editor Child
phonology a book of exercises for students San Diego CA Singular 57ndash71
212 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Bleile K M 1995 Manual of articulation and phonological disorders San
Diego CA Singular
Bourgeois M S 1998 Functional outcome assessment of adults with
dementia Seminars in Speech and Hearing 19 261ndash75
Bowen C 2004 Child Language Teaching and Therapy 20 245ndash60
Campbell T F Dollaghan C A Rockette H E Paradise J L Feldman H
M Shriberg L D Sabo D L and Kurs-Lasky M 2003 Risk factors
for speech delay of unknown origin in 3-year-old children Child
Development 74 346ndash57
Chan A McAllister L and Wilson L 1998 An investigation of the agendash
MLU relationship and factors which predict MLU in two and three year
old Australian children Asia Pacific Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing 3 97ndash108
Christensen C A and Baker C D 2002 Pedagogy observation and
the construction of learning disability Pedagogy Culture and Society
10 73ndash93
Crowe Hall B J 1991 Attitudes of fourth and sixth graders toward peers with
mild articulation disorders Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 22 334ndash40
Duchan J F 2001a Impairment and social views of speech-language
pathology clinical practices re-examined Advances in Speech-Language
Pathology 3 37ndash46
Duchan J F 2001b Social and impairment approaches viewed in a forest and
in the shadows of a city street Advances in Speech-Language Pathology
3 73ndash79
Eadie T L 2003 The ICF A proposed framework for comprehensive
rehabilitation of individuals who use alaryngeal speech American
Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 12 189ndash97
Elbert M and Gierut J A 1986 Handbook of clinical phonology
approaches to assessment and treatment London Taylor amp Francis
Enderby P and John A 1997 Therapy outcome measures speech-language
pathology technical manual London Singular
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1992 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder linguistic
and personality results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35
1114ndash25
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1994 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder educational
and occupational results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37
1341ndash53
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 213
Flipsen P Shriberg L D Weismer G Karlsson H B and McSweeny J L
2001 Acoustic phenotypes for speech-genetics studies reference data for
residual =3= distortions Clinical Linguistics and Phonetics 15 603ndash30
Gibbon F E 1999 Undifferentiated lingual gestures in children with
articulation=phonological disorders Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing Research 42 382ndash97
Gierut J A 1998 Treatment efficacy functional phonological disorders in
children Journal of Speech Language Hearing Research 41 S85ndash100
Gierut J A Morrisette M L Hughes M T and Rowland S 1996
Phonological treatment efficacy and developmental norms Language
Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 27 215ndash30
Gillon G T 2000 The efficacy of phonological awareness intervention for
children with spoken language impairment Language Speech and Hear-
ing Services in Schools 31 126ndash41
Goldman R and Fristoe M 1986 Goldman Fristoe Test of Articulation
Revised Circle Pines MN American Guidance Service
Green B and Kostogriz A 2002 Learning difficulties and the new literacy
studies a socially critical perspective In Soler J Wearmouth J and
Reid G editors Contextualising difficulties in literacy development
exploring politics culture ethnicity and ethics Milton Keynes The Open
University
Griffin S Wilson L Clark L and McLeod S 2001 Speech pathology
applications of automatic speech recognition technology In Wilson L
and Hewat S editors Proceedings of the 2001 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
293ndash99
Golding-Kushner K 1995 Treatment of articulation and resonance disorders
associated with cleft palate and VPI In Shprintzen R and Bardach J
editors Cleft palate speech management a multidisciplinary approach
St Louis Mosby 327ndash63
Harasty J and Reed V A 1994 The prevalence of speech and language
impairment in two Sydney metropolitan schools Australian Journal of
Human Communication Disorders 22 1ndash23
Harding A and Grunwell P 1998 Active versus passive cleft-type speech
characteristics International Journal of Language and Communication
Disorders 33 329ndash52
Hersh D 1999 Impairment to empowerment social model theory and
aphasia therapy In McLeod S and McAllister L editors Proceedings
of the 1999 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 125ndash30
214 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Hodge M 1983 Assessment and treatment of a child with a developmental
speech disorder a biological behavioural perspective Seminars in Speech
and Language 14 128ndash41
Hodson B W 1994 Helping individuals become intelligible literate and
articulate the role of phonology Topics in Language Disorders 14 1ndash16
Hodson B W and Paden E P 1981 Phonological processes which
characterize unintelligible and intelligible speech in early childhood
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 46 369ndash73
James D van Doorn J and McLeod S 2002 Segment production in mono-
di- and polysyllabic words in children aged 3ndash7 years In Windsor F
Kelly L and Hewlett N editors Themes in Clinical Phonetics and
Linguistics Hillsdale NJ Lawrence Erlbaum 287ndash98
Jordan L and Kaiser W 1996 Aphasia a social approach London
Chapman and Hall
Kamhi A G 2000 Practice makes perfect the incompatibility of practicing
speech and meaningful communication Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 31 182ndash85
Kent R D Miolo G and Bloedel S 1994 The intelligibility of childrenrsquos
speech a review of evaluation procedures American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 3 81ndash95
Koegel L K Koegel R L and Costello-Ingham J 1986 Programming
rapid generalization of correct articulation through self-monitoring proce-
dures Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 24ndash32
Kovarsky D 2001 Ruminating on impairments-based assessment and inter-
vention Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 59ndash62
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1992 Intelligibility assessment in
developmental phonological disorders accuracy of caregiver gloss
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35 1095ndash1104
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1993 Speech normalization in develop-
mental phonological disorders a retrospective study of capability-focus
theory Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 24 10ndash18
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1998 The capability-focus treatment
framework for child speech disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 7 27ndash38
Lai C S L Fisher S E Hurst J A Vargha-Khadem F and Monaco A P
2001 A forkhead-domain gene is mutated in severe speech and language
disorder Nature 413 519ndash23
Larrivee L S and Catts H W 1999 Early reading achievement in children
with expressive phonological disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 8 118ndash28
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 215
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
Impaired body structure can result in impaired body function For example
a person with a cleft palate may have nasal emission during speech An
impairment-based speech goal could therefore include reduction of audible
nasal emission during the production of high-pressure consonants (stops
fricatives and affricates) (Harding and Grunwell 1998) This may have the
social advantage of being more intelligible and less different or obtrusive
Other more subtle impairments in body structure and function that
influence speech production can be detected via oromusculature examination
(for example Ozanne 1992 Robbins and Klee 1987) with examples of
impaired body structure including tongue-tie and examples of body function
impairment include difficulty on diadochokinesis (rapid speech movement)
tasks Debate exists as to the impact on speech production as a result of these
more subtle impairments of body structure and function Similarly strong
debate surrounds the use of oral-motor exercises to facilitate speech sound
acquisition in children with speech impairment Lof (2003 9) provides a
summary of this debate and concludes the lsquothere is little if any theoretical
philosophical or clinical justification for using oral motor exercises to improve
speech sound production skillsrsquo
Impairments of body structure and function relating to hearing can be
detected via audiological examination such as tympanometry An example of
impairment of body structure is otitis media (glue ear) while an example of
body function impairment is hearing loss Controversy surrounds the inter-
relationship between otitis media (impaired body structure) and speech
perception=production (body function) Shriberg et al (2000a 2000b) has
altered the debate about whether or not otitis media is the cause of speech
impairment to the notion that there is increased risk of speech impairment as a
result of occurrences of otitis media However Campbell et al (2003 353)
found that lsquopersistent otitis media in the first three years of life did not
significantly increase the risk of speech delay after controlling for relevant
covariatesrsquo A social intervention relating to aural body structure and function
differences is the Healthy Little Ears project a health promotion project with
children in Australia (Mid Western Area Health Service 1999) Within this
programme children are encouraged to blow their nose each day to increase
functioning of the eustachian tube and decrease the occurrence of otitis
media
Genetics research has opened new areas of knowledge of impairment at the
micro level of body structure It may be the case that genetic abnormality may
account for children exhibiting impaired body function but previously thought
of as having intact body structures For example Lai et al (2001) described the
FOXP2 gene chromosome 7 as relating to speech apraxia Flipsen et al (2001)
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 205
have described acoustic markers that are indicative for genetic studies of
speech impairment The influence of these genetic breakthroughs on goal
setting in speech intervention may include discussion of familial histories
(for example Lewis et al 1989 Lewis and Freebairn 1993) and genetic
counselling Early intervention opportunities may be made for younger family
members of the child referred for speech intervention Early identification
can also lead to intervention opportunities to support academic success
particularly with respect to reading and spelling (Lewis et al 2000)
To date the majority of children who are seen by SLTs have communication
impairments of unknown origin (Shriberg et al 1986) indicating that their
body structure is considered to be intact These children have difficulty with
body functions such as the production of speech sounds Traditional SLT
measures of the speech function of these children have included the array of
articulation=phonology tests such as the Edinburgh Articulation Test (Anthony
et al 1971) and the Computerized Articulation and Phonology Evaluation
System (CAPES) (Masterson and Bernhardt 2002) The range of speech
analyses includes phonological analyses [for example Profile of Phonology
(PROPHthorn ) Long et al 2002] nonlinear analyses (Bernhardt and Stemberger
2000) and psycholinguistic analyses (Stackhouse and Wells 1993) Addition-
ally objective measures including acoustic (for example spectrographic) and
physiological (for example electropalatographic Gibbon 1999) tools are
enabling more accurate description of speech (Ball et al 2001) Children
with speech impairments may receive assessment reports concluding with
impairment-based goals such as to increase the percentage of consonants
correct (PCC) decrease the occurrence of various phonological processes or to
produce a list of phonemes expected but not produced correctly by the child
For children with impaired speech function there has been extensive debate
among SLTs regarding appropriate intervention goals Two dichotomous
approaches to goal selection have been proposed First the most knowledge
method (also called the traditional or developmental approach) and second the
least knowledge method (nontraditional nondevelopmental approach) (Bleile
1995) For the most knowledge method intervention goals differ minimally
from the sounds the child already produces (Elbert and Gierut 1986) That is
sounds or phonological processes are selected as intervention goals because
they are earlier developing stimulable and produced correctly in particular
contextual environments (Bernthal and Bankson 1998) In contrast in the least
knowledge method lsquo treatment targets differ from the childrsquos existing abilities
by multiple featuresrsquo (Elbert and Gierut 1986) Therefore sounds or processes
are selected because they are nonstimulable phonetically more complex have
phonologically marked properties reflect least phonological knowledge as
206 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
categorized by inventory constraints (with respect to phonemes) and are later
acquired (Gierut et al 1996) Gierut (1998) provides evidence that treatment
goals are achieved efficiently if children are taught sounds or sound pairs that
are not in a childrsquos pretreatment repertoire and developmentally later-acquired
sounds that are phonetically more complex acoustically undifferentiated and
nonstimulable that is following the least knowledge approach In contrast
Rvachew and Nowak (2001) compared the most knowledge (traditional) and
least knowledge (nontraditional) approaches for 48 children with moderate to
severe phonological disorders The study had four major findings children
made more progress toward acquiring target sounds through a traditional
approach the approaches did not differ in generalization from treated to
untreated sounds children liked both approaches parents were more favourable
to the traditional approach These authors have debated their different inter-
pretations of the outcomes of selecting the traditional and nontraditional
approaches in Morrisette and Gierut (2003) and Rvachew and Nowak (2003)
However Williams (2003) adds another dimension to this debate in her helpful
overview and discussion of five approaches to target selection As well as
the traditional and nontraditional approaches she includes markedness the
systemic function of sounds within a given sound system contrastive sounds
and lexical properties of treatment words She concludes by advocating more
research that addresses the impact of additive relationships between these
different approaches
Some questions following on from these approaches to impairment-based
goal selection by SLTs include the following Should treatment goals include
sounds for which the child is not stimulable (Powell 2003) Do children learn
sounds that are stimulable without having to be taught (Elbert and Gierut
1986 Powell and Miccio 1996) Should treatment goals target later-acquired
sounds Does teaching later-acquired sounds facilitate linguistic generaliza-
tion more readily than teaching earlier-acquired ones (Gierut 1998 Rvachew
and Nowak 2001) Although these questions need to be asked it is not
possible to predict with certainty what the most appropriate goal is for an
individual child In order to appropriately answer questions such as these
SLTs need to add to their impairment-based approach focusing on body
structures and functions The ICF provides additional areas of consideration to
enable appropriate goal setting for each individual
Activities and participation
The ICF model specifies consideration of activities and participation in
facilitating health and well-being Some that have relevance to children with
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 207
speech impairment include speaking conversation learning and applying
knowledge interpersonal interactions and relationships community social
and civic life Each of these will be addressed with relation to children with
speech impairment
Within the last decade SLTs have appropriated measures of activity and
participation that consider (to some extent) the social impact of speaking and
conversation One measure of activity that has been formalized as an assess-
ment practice is the level of intelligibility (Bleile 1995 Kent et al 1994
Kwiatkowski and Shriberg 1992) The Childrenrsquos Speech Intelligibility
Measure (Wilcox and Morris 1999) is one commercially available sampling
tool to quantify the extent of intelligibility of individual childrenrsquos speech by
untrained listeners There are few examples of ways in which SLTs consider
participation within speaking and conversation by children with speech
impairment One example is the Therapy Outcomes Measure (Enderby and
John 1997) which includes a specific subsection on childrenrsquos speech
Consideration of activities and participation also includes the influence of
the impairment on learning and applying knowledge With the high co-
occurrence of children with speech impairments having reading and spelling
difficulties (Larrivee and Catts 1999) it is essential that goals are developed
around the facilitation of academic skills (Hodson 1994) Intervention
targeting phonological awareness should accompany speech intervention
(Gillon 2000) Partnerships between teachers and SLTs are essential for
appropriate goal setting to facilitate successful oral and literate communicative
skills throughout the lives of these children
Further SLTs and teachers can consider interpersonal interactions and
relationships in their intervention planning for children with speech impair-
ment Pertinent social assessment practices may consist of a discussion with
the child his=her parents siblings friends grandparents and other significant
people to ascertain social goals and barriers interests and hopes (Duchan
2001a) Pretty (1995) suggested a number of goals congruent with a social
model for a four-year old girl with severe speech impairment The goals
focused on the interpersonal interactions and relationships with her family
teacher friends peers and peersrsquo parents For example the teacher and SLT
collaborated to promote communicative success at preschool including
strategies to repair communication breakdowns encouraging a group of her
peers to ask for repetition when they did not understand BJ or to ask BJ to
lsquoshow mersquo BJrsquos family were encouraged to look at her when she spoke to them
use all available cues (for example maintaining a diary of significant events
that she may want to communicate) and keep a list of BJrsquos pronunciations of
important words (for example the name of her best friend) These goals based
208 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
on activity and participation can readily be adapted for any child with a speech
impairment
Finally consideration of community social and civic life of children with
speech impairment is rarely discussed However there is scope for socially
based intervention goals to facilitate activity and participation in this context
Friends can be encouraged to spend time talking and babbling with a baby
who has a craniofacial anomaly in order to develop social interactions despite
the fact that the child may look different and have reduced time for social
interaction due to the extensive amount of time spent feeding Another
example of a social goal for people with a hearing impairment would consist
of public education to decrease background noise and to encourage people to
look at a person with a hearing impairment while talking with them
When considering activity and participation the ICF allows for comparison
between performance and capacity There may be a mismatch between a
childrsquos performance within their daily lives and their communicative capacity
on standardized speech assessment tools At times children are more capable
within the confines of a standardized assessment than they demonstrate within
the complex communicative demands of the classroom At other times
children exhibit a variety of compensatory strategies to minimize commu-
nicative difficulty that is evident on standardized assessment tasks Considera-
tion of performance and capacity is an important component within the
capability focus model described by Kwiatkowski and Shriberg (1993
1998) who have successfully tested this with hundreds of children who
have received speech intervention Even while undertaking standardized
assessment tools there may be a mismatch between performance on one
versus another demonstrating the mismatch between performance and capa-
city Some areas of difference include single word versus connected speech
(McLeod et al 1994 Morrison and Shriberg 1992) imitated versus sponta-
neous speech (Leonard et al 1978) stimulable versus nonstimulable sounds
(Powell and Miccio 1996) monosyllabic versus polysyllabic words (James et
al 2002) The difference between a childrsquos communicative performance and
capacity should be considered when developing appropriate goals
Contextual factors
Environmental factors
Some of the environmental factors mentioned by WHO that relate to children
with speech impairment include products and technology support and
relationships attitudes and services systems and policies
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 209
There is a burgeoning industry of products and technology utilizing speech-
activated devices for tasks such as computer operation word processing home
banking navigation and telephone directory assistance Intelligible speech is
essential for the use of speech-activated devices and can place restrictions on
the lives of adults who have residual speech impairments (Griffin et al 2001)
While children with speech impairment currently are not affected by this
technology if intelligible speech is not achieved by adulthood incorporation
within future society may be limited Further with the advances of technology
it is possible that speech-activated devices may be a common part of living for
children and adults alike
Probably the most important environmental factor relating to children with
speech impairment is support and relationships The incorporation of parental
support into the intervention practices is frequently a key to success (see
Bowen this issue) There is some research suggesting links between inter-
vention outcomes and environmental factors such as socioeconomic status
maternal IQ and maternal educational level (Chan et al 1998) Wider
networks of family friends and teachers are also important environmental
influences
Societal attitudes towards children adolescents and adults with speech
impairments are frequently negative (Crowe Hall 1991 Madison 1992
Silverman and Falk 1992) For example Silverman and Paulus (1989)
compared childrenrsquos attitudes towards a child who uses=w=for=r=with a typical
speaker The child with the mild speech impairment was considered to be less
talkative and hear less well than his=her peers dysfluent unpleasant to listen
to soft boring dull more tense nervous afraid handicapped isolated
uncomfortable Further Anderson and Antonak (1992) found that social
acceptance of an actor with a mild speech sound impairment was less
positive than the same actor demonstrating a physical disability Research
by Felsenfeld et al (1992) adds another dimension people with speech
impairment were found to be less extroverted and socialized with fewer
people than people with typical speech development Clearly people with
speech impairment may be compromised by societal attitudes necessitating
goals directed towards society as well as working at the impairment level
The services systems and policies relating to individual children are as
varied as each individual and can influence the type of schooling the child
receives the type and amount of support the child receives at school whether
a child is eligible for SLT intervention and so forth Political factors can affect
the actuality of intervention for individual clients For example in some health
sectors within the USA the politicization of health care dictates the number of
SLT sessions a person with a particular impairment can receive Philosophical
210 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
attitudes toward the labelling of a child with a speech or language impairment
can influence the type of goals developed for a child (Christensen and Baker
2002 Green and Kostogriz 2002) For example McDermott (1993 272) has
argued that lsquothere is no such thing as LD [Learning Disability] only a social
practice of displaying noticing documenting remediating and explaining itrsquo
McLeod (2003) described the distinction between the use of the terms
lsquonormalrsquo and lsquotypicalrsquo and SLTsrsquo role in the categorization of children along
the normalndashabnormal divide Simmons-Mackie (2001) described differing
clinical assumptions leading to differing intervention approaches A childrsquos
experiences of receiving intervention from different people with differing
clinical assumptions is documented by Kovarsky (2001) Thus services
systems and policies can play a role in goal setting for children with speech
impairment
Personal factors
Attached to every lsquospeech impairmentrsquo is a real child (Bleile 1991) His or her
unique makeup must be considered within his=her cultural milieu in order to
determine the most appropriate intervention goals The ICF (WHO 2001 8)
recognizes the lsquolarge social and cultural variancersquo including gender age other
health conditions coping style social background education profession past
experience and character style Currently research into typically developing
children has demonstrated the wide range of individual differences (for
example McLeod et al 2001) For children with speech impairment there
are some case studies documenting the effect of personal factors on appro-
priate goal setting and intervention outcomes For example Kamhi (2000)
describes the progress of phonological intervention with his daughter Franne
Frannersquos lsquostubbornnessrsquo and desire to communicate with her parents led to
delineation between speech sound practice with her SLT and meaningful
communication with her parents He writes lsquoFrannersquos reluctance to practise
speech sounds was her way to let us know that we should focus on what
she said when she spoke rather than on how she said itrsquo (Kamhi 2000 183)
One important and documented factor to consider in the selection of speech
goals is the childrsquos personal ability to evaluate his=her speech Self-evaluation
occurs when the child judges the accuracy of his=her response prior to explicit
feedback from the clinician (cf Koegel et al 1986) lsquoSelf-evaluation appears
to be a central concept within diverse theoretical views of normal speech
development and within approaches to and explications of successful
interventionrsquo (Shriberg and Kwiatkowski 1987 154) Thus SLTs can incor-
porate self-evaluation within the intervention goals
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 211
Conclusion What goals are appropriate
It can be argued that the ultimate goal of speech intervention is to bring about
correct production of speech sounds resulting in intelligible conversational
speech within a childrsquos milieu (cf Kamhi 2000 Powell 1991) However
other similarly important goals may be to enhance a childrsquos participation in
social interaction to increase self-esteem or to decrease negative societal
attitudes towards people with speech impairment The ICF is a meta-theory
that allows for consideration of all these possibilities and is enhanced by
collaboration between SLTs and teachers A summary of possible goals
relating to the ICF is provided in Table 1 The most important outcome of
the present discussion is to reiterate that every child is unique requiring a
different approach to best meet their needs (Lowe 1994) Thus it is important
to consider all the factors before making a decision then to devise goals in
consultation and monitor progress (see Baker and McLeod this issue)
Continual revision and consultation will result in appropriate outcomes for
individual children as well as society
References
American Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Scope of practice in
speech-language pathology Rockville MD ASHA
Anderson R J and Antonak R F 1992 The influence of attitudes and
contact on reactions to persons with physical and speech disabilities
Rehabilitation Counselling Bulletin 35 240ndash47
Anthony A Bogle D Ingram T T S and McIsaac M W 1971 The
Edinburgh articulation test Edinburgh E and S Livingstone
Baker E and McLeod S 2004 Evidence-based management of children with
phonological impairment of unknown origin Child Language Teaching
and Therapy 20 261ndash85
Ball M J Gracco V and Stone M 2001 A comparison of imaging
techniques for the investigation of normal and disordered speech produc-
tion Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 313ndash24
Bernhardt B H and Stemberger J P 2000 Workbook in nonlinear phonology
for clinical application Austin TX ProEd
Bernthal J E and Bankson N W 1998 Articulation and phonological
disorders 4th edition Boston Allyn and Bacon
Bleile K M 1991 Individual differences In Bleile K M editor Child
phonology a book of exercises for students San Diego CA Singular 57ndash71
212 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Bleile K M 1995 Manual of articulation and phonological disorders San
Diego CA Singular
Bourgeois M S 1998 Functional outcome assessment of adults with
dementia Seminars in Speech and Hearing 19 261ndash75
Bowen C 2004 Child Language Teaching and Therapy 20 245ndash60
Campbell T F Dollaghan C A Rockette H E Paradise J L Feldman H
M Shriberg L D Sabo D L and Kurs-Lasky M 2003 Risk factors
for speech delay of unknown origin in 3-year-old children Child
Development 74 346ndash57
Chan A McAllister L and Wilson L 1998 An investigation of the agendash
MLU relationship and factors which predict MLU in two and three year
old Australian children Asia Pacific Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing 3 97ndash108
Christensen C A and Baker C D 2002 Pedagogy observation and
the construction of learning disability Pedagogy Culture and Society
10 73ndash93
Crowe Hall B J 1991 Attitudes of fourth and sixth graders toward peers with
mild articulation disorders Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 22 334ndash40
Duchan J F 2001a Impairment and social views of speech-language
pathology clinical practices re-examined Advances in Speech-Language
Pathology 3 37ndash46
Duchan J F 2001b Social and impairment approaches viewed in a forest and
in the shadows of a city street Advances in Speech-Language Pathology
3 73ndash79
Eadie T L 2003 The ICF A proposed framework for comprehensive
rehabilitation of individuals who use alaryngeal speech American
Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 12 189ndash97
Elbert M and Gierut J A 1986 Handbook of clinical phonology
approaches to assessment and treatment London Taylor amp Francis
Enderby P and John A 1997 Therapy outcome measures speech-language
pathology technical manual London Singular
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1992 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder linguistic
and personality results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35
1114ndash25
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1994 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder educational
and occupational results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37
1341ndash53
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 213
Flipsen P Shriberg L D Weismer G Karlsson H B and McSweeny J L
2001 Acoustic phenotypes for speech-genetics studies reference data for
residual =3= distortions Clinical Linguistics and Phonetics 15 603ndash30
Gibbon F E 1999 Undifferentiated lingual gestures in children with
articulation=phonological disorders Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing Research 42 382ndash97
Gierut J A 1998 Treatment efficacy functional phonological disorders in
children Journal of Speech Language Hearing Research 41 S85ndash100
Gierut J A Morrisette M L Hughes M T and Rowland S 1996
Phonological treatment efficacy and developmental norms Language
Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 27 215ndash30
Gillon G T 2000 The efficacy of phonological awareness intervention for
children with spoken language impairment Language Speech and Hear-
ing Services in Schools 31 126ndash41
Goldman R and Fristoe M 1986 Goldman Fristoe Test of Articulation
Revised Circle Pines MN American Guidance Service
Green B and Kostogriz A 2002 Learning difficulties and the new literacy
studies a socially critical perspective In Soler J Wearmouth J and
Reid G editors Contextualising difficulties in literacy development
exploring politics culture ethnicity and ethics Milton Keynes The Open
University
Griffin S Wilson L Clark L and McLeod S 2001 Speech pathology
applications of automatic speech recognition technology In Wilson L
and Hewat S editors Proceedings of the 2001 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
293ndash99
Golding-Kushner K 1995 Treatment of articulation and resonance disorders
associated with cleft palate and VPI In Shprintzen R and Bardach J
editors Cleft palate speech management a multidisciplinary approach
St Louis Mosby 327ndash63
Harasty J and Reed V A 1994 The prevalence of speech and language
impairment in two Sydney metropolitan schools Australian Journal of
Human Communication Disorders 22 1ndash23
Harding A and Grunwell P 1998 Active versus passive cleft-type speech
characteristics International Journal of Language and Communication
Disorders 33 329ndash52
Hersh D 1999 Impairment to empowerment social model theory and
aphasia therapy In McLeod S and McAllister L editors Proceedings
of the 1999 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 125ndash30
214 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Hodge M 1983 Assessment and treatment of a child with a developmental
speech disorder a biological behavioural perspective Seminars in Speech
and Language 14 128ndash41
Hodson B W 1994 Helping individuals become intelligible literate and
articulate the role of phonology Topics in Language Disorders 14 1ndash16
Hodson B W and Paden E P 1981 Phonological processes which
characterize unintelligible and intelligible speech in early childhood
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 46 369ndash73
James D van Doorn J and McLeod S 2002 Segment production in mono-
di- and polysyllabic words in children aged 3ndash7 years In Windsor F
Kelly L and Hewlett N editors Themes in Clinical Phonetics and
Linguistics Hillsdale NJ Lawrence Erlbaum 287ndash98
Jordan L and Kaiser W 1996 Aphasia a social approach London
Chapman and Hall
Kamhi A G 2000 Practice makes perfect the incompatibility of practicing
speech and meaningful communication Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 31 182ndash85
Kent R D Miolo G and Bloedel S 1994 The intelligibility of childrenrsquos
speech a review of evaluation procedures American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 3 81ndash95
Koegel L K Koegel R L and Costello-Ingham J 1986 Programming
rapid generalization of correct articulation through self-monitoring proce-
dures Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 24ndash32
Kovarsky D 2001 Ruminating on impairments-based assessment and inter-
vention Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 59ndash62
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1992 Intelligibility assessment in
developmental phonological disorders accuracy of caregiver gloss
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35 1095ndash1104
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1993 Speech normalization in develop-
mental phonological disorders a retrospective study of capability-focus
theory Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 24 10ndash18
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1998 The capability-focus treatment
framework for child speech disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 7 27ndash38
Lai C S L Fisher S E Hurst J A Vargha-Khadem F and Monaco A P
2001 A forkhead-domain gene is mutated in severe speech and language
disorder Nature 413 519ndash23
Larrivee L S and Catts H W 1999 Early reading achievement in children
with expressive phonological disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 8 118ndash28
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 215
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
have described acoustic markers that are indicative for genetic studies of
speech impairment The influence of these genetic breakthroughs on goal
setting in speech intervention may include discussion of familial histories
(for example Lewis et al 1989 Lewis and Freebairn 1993) and genetic
counselling Early intervention opportunities may be made for younger family
members of the child referred for speech intervention Early identification
can also lead to intervention opportunities to support academic success
particularly with respect to reading and spelling (Lewis et al 2000)
To date the majority of children who are seen by SLTs have communication
impairments of unknown origin (Shriberg et al 1986) indicating that their
body structure is considered to be intact These children have difficulty with
body functions such as the production of speech sounds Traditional SLT
measures of the speech function of these children have included the array of
articulation=phonology tests such as the Edinburgh Articulation Test (Anthony
et al 1971) and the Computerized Articulation and Phonology Evaluation
System (CAPES) (Masterson and Bernhardt 2002) The range of speech
analyses includes phonological analyses [for example Profile of Phonology
(PROPHthorn ) Long et al 2002] nonlinear analyses (Bernhardt and Stemberger
2000) and psycholinguistic analyses (Stackhouse and Wells 1993) Addition-
ally objective measures including acoustic (for example spectrographic) and
physiological (for example electropalatographic Gibbon 1999) tools are
enabling more accurate description of speech (Ball et al 2001) Children
with speech impairments may receive assessment reports concluding with
impairment-based goals such as to increase the percentage of consonants
correct (PCC) decrease the occurrence of various phonological processes or to
produce a list of phonemes expected but not produced correctly by the child
For children with impaired speech function there has been extensive debate
among SLTs regarding appropriate intervention goals Two dichotomous
approaches to goal selection have been proposed First the most knowledge
method (also called the traditional or developmental approach) and second the
least knowledge method (nontraditional nondevelopmental approach) (Bleile
1995) For the most knowledge method intervention goals differ minimally
from the sounds the child already produces (Elbert and Gierut 1986) That is
sounds or phonological processes are selected as intervention goals because
they are earlier developing stimulable and produced correctly in particular
contextual environments (Bernthal and Bankson 1998) In contrast in the least
knowledge method lsquo treatment targets differ from the childrsquos existing abilities
by multiple featuresrsquo (Elbert and Gierut 1986) Therefore sounds or processes
are selected because they are nonstimulable phonetically more complex have
phonologically marked properties reflect least phonological knowledge as
206 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
categorized by inventory constraints (with respect to phonemes) and are later
acquired (Gierut et al 1996) Gierut (1998) provides evidence that treatment
goals are achieved efficiently if children are taught sounds or sound pairs that
are not in a childrsquos pretreatment repertoire and developmentally later-acquired
sounds that are phonetically more complex acoustically undifferentiated and
nonstimulable that is following the least knowledge approach In contrast
Rvachew and Nowak (2001) compared the most knowledge (traditional) and
least knowledge (nontraditional) approaches for 48 children with moderate to
severe phonological disorders The study had four major findings children
made more progress toward acquiring target sounds through a traditional
approach the approaches did not differ in generalization from treated to
untreated sounds children liked both approaches parents were more favourable
to the traditional approach These authors have debated their different inter-
pretations of the outcomes of selecting the traditional and nontraditional
approaches in Morrisette and Gierut (2003) and Rvachew and Nowak (2003)
However Williams (2003) adds another dimension to this debate in her helpful
overview and discussion of five approaches to target selection As well as
the traditional and nontraditional approaches she includes markedness the
systemic function of sounds within a given sound system contrastive sounds
and lexical properties of treatment words She concludes by advocating more
research that addresses the impact of additive relationships between these
different approaches
Some questions following on from these approaches to impairment-based
goal selection by SLTs include the following Should treatment goals include
sounds for which the child is not stimulable (Powell 2003) Do children learn
sounds that are stimulable without having to be taught (Elbert and Gierut
1986 Powell and Miccio 1996) Should treatment goals target later-acquired
sounds Does teaching later-acquired sounds facilitate linguistic generaliza-
tion more readily than teaching earlier-acquired ones (Gierut 1998 Rvachew
and Nowak 2001) Although these questions need to be asked it is not
possible to predict with certainty what the most appropriate goal is for an
individual child In order to appropriately answer questions such as these
SLTs need to add to their impairment-based approach focusing on body
structures and functions The ICF provides additional areas of consideration to
enable appropriate goal setting for each individual
Activities and participation
The ICF model specifies consideration of activities and participation in
facilitating health and well-being Some that have relevance to children with
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 207
speech impairment include speaking conversation learning and applying
knowledge interpersonal interactions and relationships community social
and civic life Each of these will be addressed with relation to children with
speech impairment
Within the last decade SLTs have appropriated measures of activity and
participation that consider (to some extent) the social impact of speaking and
conversation One measure of activity that has been formalized as an assess-
ment practice is the level of intelligibility (Bleile 1995 Kent et al 1994
Kwiatkowski and Shriberg 1992) The Childrenrsquos Speech Intelligibility
Measure (Wilcox and Morris 1999) is one commercially available sampling
tool to quantify the extent of intelligibility of individual childrenrsquos speech by
untrained listeners There are few examples of ways in which SLTs consider
participation within speaking and conversation by children with speech
impairment One example is the Therapy Outcomes Measure (Enderby and
John 1997) which includes a specific subsection on childrenrsquos speech
Consideration of activities and participation also includes the influence of
the impairment on learning and applying knowledge With the high co-
occurrence of children with speech impairments having reading and spelling
difficulties (Larrivee and Catts 1999) it is essential that goals are developed
around the facilitation of academic skills (Hodson 1994) Intervention
targeting phonological awareness should accompany speech intervention
(Gillon 2000) Partnerships between teachers and SLTs are essential for
appropriate goal setting to facilitate successful oral and literate communicative
skills throughout the lives of these children
Further SLTs and teachers can consider interpersonal interactions and
relationships in their intervention planning for children with speech impair-
ment Pertinent social assessment practices may consist of a discussion with
the child his=her parents siblings friends grandparents and other significant
people to ascertain social goals and barriers interests and hopes (Duchan
2001a) Pretty (1995) suggested a number of goals congruent with a social
model for a four-year old girl with severe speech impairment The goals
focused on the interpersonal interactions and relationships with her family
teacher friends peers and peersrsquo parents For example the teacher and SLT
collaborated to promote communicative success at preschool including
strategies to repair communication breakdowns encouraging a group of her
peers to ask for repetition when they did not understand BJ or to ask BJ to
lsquoshow mersquo BJrsquos family were encouraged to look at her when she spoke to them
use all available cues (for example maintaining a diary of significant events
that she may want to communicate) and keep a list of BJrsquos pronunciations of
important words (for example the name of her best friend) These goals based
208 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
on activity and participation can readily be adapted for any child with a speech
impairment
Finally consideration of community social and civic life of children with
speech impairment is rarely discussed However there is scope for socially
based intervention goals to facilitate activity and participation in this context
Friends can be encouraged to spend time talking and babbling with a baby
who has a craniofacial anomaly in order to develop social interactions despite
the fact that the child may look different and have reduced time for social
interaction due to the extensive amount of time spent feeding Another
example of a social goal for people with a hearing impairment would consist
of public education to decrease background noise and to encourage people to
look at a person with a hearing impairment while talking with them
When considering activity and participation the ICF allows for comparison
between performance and capacity There may be a mismatch between a
childrsquos performance within their daily lives and their communicative capacity
on standardized speech assessment tools At times children are more capable
within the confines of a standardized assessment than they demonstrate within
the complex communicative demands of the classroom At other times
children exhibit a variety of compensatory strategies to minimize commu-
nicative difficulty that is evident on standardized assessment tasks Considera-
tion of performance and capacity is an important component within the
capability focus model described by Kwiatkowski and Shriberg (1993
1998) who have successfully tested this with hundreds of children who
have received speech intervention Even while undertaking standardized
assessment tools there may be a mismatch between performance on one
versus another demonstrating the mismatch between performance and capa-
city Some areas of difference include single word versus connected speech
(McLeod et al 1994 Morrison and Shriberg 1992) imitated versus sponta-
neous speech (Leonard et al 1978) stimulable versus nonstimulable sounds
(Powell and Miccio 1996) monosyllabic versus polysyllabic words (James et
al 2002) The difference between a childrsquos communicative performance and
capacity should be considered when developing appropriate goals
Contextual factors
Environmental factors
Some of the environmental factors mentioned by WHO that relate to children
with speech impairment include products and technology support and
relationships attitudes and services systems and policies
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 209
There is a burgeoning industry of products and technology utilizing speech-
activated devices for tasks such as computer operation word processing home
banking navigation and telephone directory assistance Intelligible speech is
essential for the use of speech-activated devices and can place restrictions on
the lives of adults who have residual speech impairments (Griffin et al 2001)
While children with speech impairment currently are not affected by this
technology if intelligible speech is not achieved by adulthood incorporation
within future society may be limited Further with the advances of technology
it is possible that speech-activated devices may be a common part of living for
children and adults alike
Probably the most important environmental factor relating to children with
speech impairment is support and relationships The incorporation of parental
support into the intervention practices is frequently a key to success (see
Bowen this issue) There is some research suggesting links between inter-
vention outcomes and environmental factors such as socioeconomic status
maternal IQ and maternal educational level (Chan et al 1998) Wider
networks of family friends and teachers are also important environmental
influences
Societal attitudes towards children adolescents and adults with speech
impairments are frequently negative (Crowe Hall 1991 Madison 1992
Silverman and Falk 1992) For example Silverman and Paulus (1989)
compared childrenrsquos attitudes towards a child who uses=w=for=r=with a typical
speaker The child with the mild speech impairment was considered to be less
talkative and hear less well than his=her peers dysfluent unpleasant to listen
to soft boring dull more tense nervous afraid handicapped isolated
uncomfortable Further Anderson and Antonak (1992) found that social
acceptance of an actor with a mild speech sound impairment was less
positive than the same actor demonstrating a physical disability Research
by Felsenfeld et al (1992) adds another dimension people with speech
impairment were found to be less extroverted and socialized with fewer
people than people with typical speech development Clearly people with
speech impairment may be compromised by societal attitudes necessitating
goals directed towards society as well as working at the impairment level
The services systems and policies relating to individual children are as
varied as each individual and can influence the type of schooling the child
receives the type and amount of support the child receives at school whether
a child is eligible for SLT intervention and so forth Political factors can affect
the actuality of intervention for individual clients For example in some health
sectors within the USA the politicization of health care dictates the number of
SLT sessions a person with a particular impairment can receive Philosophical
210 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
attitudes toward the labelling of a child with a speech or language impairment
can influence the type of goals developed for a child (Christensen and Baker
2002 Green and Kostogriz 2002) For example McDermott (1993 272) has
argued that lsquothere is no such thing as LD [Learning Disability] only a social
practice of displaying noticing documenting remediating and explaining itrsquo
McLeod (2003) described the distinction between the use of the terms
lsquonormalrsquo and lsquotypicalrsquo and SLTsrsquo role in the categorization of children along
the normalndashabnormal divide Simmons-Mackie (2001) described differing
clinical assumptions leading to differing intervention approaches A childrsquos
experiences of receiving intervention from different people with differing
clinical assumptions is documented by Kovarsky (2001) Thus services
systems and policies can play a role in goal setting for children with speech
impairment
Personal factors
Attached to every lsquospeech impairmentrsquo is a real child (Bleile 1991) His or her
unique makeup must be considered within his=her cultural milieu in order to
determine the most appropriate intervention goals The ICF (WHO 2001 8)
recognizes the lsquolarge social and cultural variancersquo including gender age other
health conditions coping style social background education profession past
experience and character style Currently research into typically developing
children has demonstrated the wide range of individual differences (for
example McLeod et al 2001) For children with speech impairment there
are some case studies documenting the effect of personal factors on appro-
priate goal setting and intervention outcomes For example Kamhi (2000)
describes the progress of phonological intervention with his daughter Franne
Frannersquos lsquostubbornnessrsquo and desire to communicate with her parents led to
delineation between speech sound practice with her SLT and meaningful
communication with her parents He writes lsquoFrannersquos reluctance to practise
speech sounds was her way to let us know that we should focus on what
she said when she spoke rather than on how she said itrsquo (Kamhi 2000 183)
One important and documented factor to consider in the selection of speech
goals is the childrsquos personal ability to evaluate his=her speech Self-evaluation
occurs when the child judges the accuracy of his=her response prior to explicit
feedback from the clinician (cf Koegel et al 1986) lsquoSelf-evaluation appears
to be a central concept within diverse theoretical views of normal speech
development and within approaches to and explications of successful
interventionrsquo (Shriberg and Kwiatkowski 1987 154) Thus SLTs can incor-
porate self-evaluation within the intervention goals
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 211
Conclusion What goals are appropriate
It can be argued that the ultimate goal of speech intervention is to bring about
correct production of speech sounds resulting in intelligible conversational
speech within a childrsquos milieu (cf Kamhi 2000 Powell 1991) However
other similarly important goals may be to enhance a childrsquos participation in
social interaction to increase self-esteem or to decrease negative societal
attitudes towards people with speech impairment The ICF is a meta-theory
that allows for consideration of all these possibilities and is enhanced by
collaboration between SLTs and teachers A summary of possible goals
relating to the ICF is provided in Table 1 The most important outcome of
the present discussion is to reiterate that every child is unique requiring a
different approach to best meet their needs (Lowe 1994) Thus it is important
to consider all the factors before making a decision then to devise goals in
consultation and monitor progress (see Baker and McLeod this issue)
Continual revision and consultation will result in appropriate outcomes for
individual children as well as society
References
American Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Scope of practice in
speech-language pathology Rockville MD ASHA
Anderson R J and Antonak R F 1992 The influence of attitudes and
contact on reactions to persons with physical and speech disabilities
Rehabilitation Counselling Bulletin 35 240ndash47
Anthony A Bogle D Ingram T T S and McIsaac M W 1971 The
Edinburgh articulation test Edinburgh E and S Livingstone
Baker E and McLeod S 2004 Evidence-based management of children with
phonological impairment of unknown origin Child Language Teaching
and Therapy 20 261ndash85
Ball M J Gracco V and Stone M 2001 A comparison of imaging
techniques for the investigation of normal and disordered speech produc-
tion Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 313ndash24
Bernhardt B H and Stemberger J P 2000 Workbook in nonlinear phonology
for clinical application Austin TX ProEd
Bernthal J E and Bankson N W 1998 Articulation and phonological
disorders 4th edition Boston Allyn and Bacon
Bleile K M 1991 Individual differences In Bleile K M editor Child
phonology a book of exercises for students San Diego CA Singular 57ndash71
212 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Bleile K M 1995 Manual of articulation and phonological disorders San
Diego CA Singular
Bourgeois M S 1998 Functional outcome assessment of adults with
dementia Seminars in Speech and Hearing 19 261ndash75
Bowen C 2004 Child Language Teaching and Therapy 20 245ndash60
Campbell T F Dollaghan C A Rockette H E Paradise J L Feldman H
M Shriberg L D Sabo D L and Kurs-Lasky M 2003 Risk factors
for speech delay of unknown origin in 3-year-old children Child
Development 74 346ndash57
Chan A McAllister L and Wilson L 1998 An investigation of the agendash
MLU relationship and factors which predict MLU in two and three year
old Australian children Asia Pacific Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing 3 97ndash108
Christensen C A and Baker C D 2002 Pedagogy observation and
the construction of learning disability Pedagogy Culture and Society
10 73ndash93
Crowe Hall B J 1991 Attitudes of fourth and sixth graders toward peers with
mild articulation disorders Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 22 334ndash40
Duchan J F 2001a Impairment and social views of speech-language
pathology clinical practices re-examined Advances in Speech-Language
Pathology 3 37ndash46
Duchan J F 2001b Social and impairment approaches viewed in a forest and
in the shadows of a city street Advances in Speech-Language Pathology
3 73ndash79
Eadie T L 2003 The ICF A proposed framework for comprehensive
rehabilitation of individuals who use alaryngeal speech American
Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 12 189ndash97
Elbert M and Gierut J A 1986 Handbook of clinical phonology
approaches to assessment and treatment London Taylor amp Francis
Enderby P and John A 1997 Therapy outcome measures speech-language
pathology technical manual London Singular
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1992 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder linguistic
and personality results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35
1114ndash25
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1994 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder educational
and occupational results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37
1341ndash53
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 213
Flipsen P Shriberg L D Weismer G Karlsson H B and McSweeny J L
2001 Acoustic phenotypes for speech-genetics studies reference data for
residual =3= distortions Clinical Linguistics and Phonetics 15 603ndash30
Gibbon F E 1999 Undifferentiated lingual gestures in children with
articulation=phonological disorders Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing Research 42 382ndash97
Gierut J A 1998 Treatment efficacy functional phonological disorders in
children Journal of Speech Language Hearing Research 41 S85ndash100
Gierut J A Morrisette M L Hughes M T and Rowland S 1996
Phonological treatment efficacy and developmental norms Language
Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 27 215ndash30
Gillon G T 2000 The efficacy of phonological awareness intervention for
children with spoken language impairment Language Speech and Hear-
ing Services in Schools 31 126ndash41
Goldman R and Fristoe M 1986 Goldman Fristoe Test of Articulation
Revised Circle Pines MN American Guidance Service
Green B and Kostogriz A 2002 Learning difficulties and the new literacy
studies a socially critical perspective In Soler J Wearmouth J and
Reid G editors Contextualising difficulties in literacy development
exploring politics culture ethnicity and ethics Milton Keynes The Open
University
Griffin S Wilson L Clark L and McLeod S 2001 Speech pathology
applications of automatic speech recognition technology In Wilson L
and Hewat S editors Proceedings of the 2001 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
293ndash99
Golding-Kushner K 1995 Treatment of articulation and resonance disorders
associated with cleft palate and VPI In Shprintzen R and Bardach J
editors Cleft palate speech management a multidisciplinary approach
St Louis Mosby 327ndash63
Harasty J and Reed V A 1994 The prevalence of speech and language
impairment in two Sydney metropolitan schools Australian Journal of
Human Communication Disorders 22 1ndash23
Harding A and Grunwell P 1998 Active versus passive cleft-type speech
characteristics International Journal of Language and Communication
Disorders 33 329ndash52
Hersh D 1999 Impairment to empowerment social model theory and
aphasia therapy In McLeod S and McAllister L editors Proceedings
of the 1999 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 125ndash30
214 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Hodge M 1983 Assessment and treatment of a child with a developmental
speech disorder a biological behavioural perspective Seminars in Speech
and Language 14 128ndash41
Hodson B W 1994 Helping individuals become intelligible literate and
articulate the role of phonology Topics in Language Disorders 14 1ndash16
Hodson B W and Paden E P 1981 Phonological processes which
characterize unintelligible and intelligible speech in early childhood
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 46 369ndash73
James D van Doorn J and McLeod S 2002 Segment production in mono-
di- and polysyllabic words in children aged 3ndash7 years In Windsor F
Kelly L and Hewlett N editors Themes in Clinical Phonetics and
Linguistics Hillsdale NJ Lawrence Erlbaum 287ndash98
Jordan L and Kaiser W 1996 Aphasia a social approach London
Chapman and Hall
Kamhi A G 2000 Practice makes perfect the incompatibility of practicing
speech and meaningful communication Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 31 182ndash85
Kent R D Miolo G and Bloedel S 1994 The intelligibility of childrenrsquos
speech a review of evaluation procedures American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 3 81ndash95
Koegel L K Koegel R L and Costello-Ingham J 1986 Programming
rapid generalization of correct articulation through self-monitoring proce-
dures Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 24ndash32
Kovarsky D 2001 Ruminating on impairments-based assessment and inter-
vention Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 59ndash62
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1992 Intelligibility assessment in
developmental phonological disorders accuracy of caregiver gloss
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35 1095ndash1104
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1993 Speech normalization in develop-
mental phonological disorders a retrospective study of capability-focus
theory Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 24 10ndash18
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1998 The capability-focus treatment
framework for child speech disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 7 27ndash38
Lai C S L Fisher S E Hurst J A Vargha-Khadem F and Monaco A P
2001 A forkhead-domain gene is mutated in severe speech and language
disorder Nature 413 519ndash23
Larrivee L S and Catts H W 1999 Early reading achievement in children
with expressive phonological disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 8 118ndash28
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 215
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
categorized by inventory constraints (with respect to phonemes) and are later
acquired (Gierut et al 1996) Gierut (1998) provides evidence that treatment
goals are achieved efficiently if children are taught sounds or sound pairs that
are not in a childrsquos pretreatment repertoire and developmentally later-acquired
sounds that are phonetically more complex acoustically undifferentiated and
nonstimulable that is following the least knowledge approach In contrast
Rvachew and Nowak (2001) compared the most knowledge (traditional) and
least knowledge (nontraditional) approaches for 48 children with moderate to
severe phonological disorders The study had four major findings children
made more progress toward acquiring target sounds through a traditional
approach the approaches did not differ in generalization from treated to
untreated sounds children liked both approaches parents were more favourable
to the traditional approach These authors have debated their different inter-
pretations of the outcomes of selecting the traditional and nontraditional
approaches in Morrisette and Gierut (2003) and Rvachew and Nowak (2003)
However Williams (2003) adds another dimension to this debate in her helpful
overview and discussion of five approaches to target selection As well as
the traditional and nontraditional approaches she includes markedness the
systemic function of sounds within a given sound system contrastive sounds
and lexical properties of treatment words She concludes by advocating more
research that addresses the impact of additive relationships between these
different approaches
Some questions following on from these approaches to impairment-based
goal selection by SLTs include the following Should treatment goals include
sounds for which the child is not stimulable (Powell 2003) Do children learn
sounds that are stimulable without having to be taught (Elbert and Gierut
1986 Powell and Miccio 1996) Should treatment goals target later-acquired
sounds Does teaching later-acquired sounds facilitate linguistic generaliza-
tion more readily than teaching earlier-acquired ones (Gierut 1998 Rvachew
and Nowak 2001) Although these questions need to be asked it is not
possible to predict with certainty what the most appropriate goal is for an
individual child In order to appropriately answer questions such as these
SLTs need to add to their impairment-based approach focusing on body
structures and functions The ICF provides additional areas of consideration to
enable appropriate goal setting for each individual
Activities and participation
The ICF model specifies consideration of activities and participation in
facilitating health and well-being Some that have relevance to children with
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 207
speech impairment include speaking conversation learning and applying
knowledge interpersonal interactions and relationships community social
and civic life Each of these will be addressed with relation to children with
speech impairment
Within the last decade SLTs have appropriated measures of activity and
participation that consider (to some extent) the social impact of speaking and
conversation One measure of activity that has been formalized as an assess-
ment practice is the level of intelligibility (Bleile 1995 Kent et al 1994
Kwiatkowski and Shriberg 1992) The Childrenrsquos Speech Intelligibility
Measure (Wilcox and Morris 1999) is one commercially available sampling
tool to quantify the extent of intelligibility of individual childrenrsquos speech by
untrained listeners There are few examples of ways in which SLTs consider
participation within speaking and conversation by children with speech
impairment One example is the Therapy Outcomes Measure (Enderby and
John 1997) which includes a specific subsection on childrenrsquos speech
Consideration of activities and participation also includes the influence of
the impairment on learning and applying knowledge With the high co-
occurrence of children with speech impairments having reading and spelling
difficulties (Larrivee and Catts 1999) it is essential that goals are developed
around the facilitation of academic skills (Hodson 1994) Intervention
targeting phonological awareness should accompany speech intervention
(Gillon 2000) Partnerships between teachers and SLTs are essential for
appropriate goal setting to facilitate successful oral and literate communicative
skills throughout the lives of these children
Further SLTs and teachers can consider interpersonal interactions and
relationships in their intervention planning for children with speech impair-
ment Pertinent social assessment practices may consist of a discussion with
the child his=her parents siblings friends grandparents and other significant
people to ascertain social goals and barriers interests and hopes (Duchan
2001a) Pretty (1995) suggested a number of goals congruent with a social
model for a four-year old girl with severe speech impairment The goals
focused on the interpersonal interactions and relationships with her family
teacher friends peers and peersrsquo parents For example the teacher and SLT
collaborated to promote communicative success at preschool including
strategies to repair communication breakdowns encouraging a group of her
peers to ask for repetition when they did not understand BJ or to ask BJ to
lsquoshow mersquo BJrsquos family were encouraged to look at her when she spoke to them
use all available cues (for example maintaining a diary of significant events
that she may want to communicate) and keep a list of BJrsquos pronunciations of
important words (for example the name of her best friend) These goals based
208 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
on activity and participation can readily be adapted for any child with a speech
impairment
Finally consideration of community social and civic life of children with
speech impairment is rarely discussed However there is scope for socially
based intervention goals to facilitate activity and participation in this context
Friends can be encouraged to spend time talking and babbling with a baby
who has a craniofacial anomaly in order to develop social interactions despite
the fact that the child may look different and have reduced time for social
interaction due to the extensive amount of time spent feeding Another
example of a social goal for people with a hearing impairment would consist
of public education to decrease background noise and to encourage people to
look at a person with a hearing impairment while talking with them
When considering activity and participation the ICF allows for comparison
between performance and capacity There may be a mismatch between a
childrsquos performance within their daily lives and their communicative capacity
on standardized speech assessment tools At times children are more capable
within the confines of a standardized assessment than they demonstrate within
the complex communicative demands of the classroom At other times
children exhibit a variety of compensatory strategies to minimize commu-
nicative difficulty that is evident on standardized assessment tasks Considera-
tion of performance and capacity is an important component within the
capability focus model described by Kwiatkowski and Shriberg (1993
1998) who have successfully tested this with hundreds of children who
have received speech intervention Even while undertaking standardized
assessment tools there may be a mismatch between performance on one
versus another demonstrating the mismatch between performance and capa-
city Some areas of difference include single word versus connected speech
(McLeod et al 1994 Morrison and Shriberg 1992) imitated versus sponta-
neous speech (Leonard et al 1978) stimulable versus nonstimulable sounds
(Powell and Miccio 1996) monosyllabic versus polysyllabic words (James et
al 2002) The difference between a childrsquos communicative performance and
capacity should be considered when developing appropriate goals
Contextual factors
Environmental factors
Some of the environmental factors mentioned by WHO that relate to children
with speech impairment include products and technology support and
relationships attitudes and services systems and policies
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 209
There is a burgeoning industry of products and technology utilizing speech-
activated devices for tasks such as computer operation word processing home
banking navigation and telephone directory assistance Intelligible speech is
essential for the use of speech-activated devices and can place restrictions on
the lives of adults who have residual speech impairments (Griffin et al 2001)
While children with speech impairment currently are not affected by this
technology if intelligible speech is not achieved by adulthood incorporation
within future society may be limited Further with the advances of technology
it is possible that speech-activated devices may be a common part of living for
children and adults alike
Probably the most important environmental factor relating to children with
speech impairment is support and relationships The incorporation of parental
support into the intervention practices is frequently a key to success (see
Bowen this issue) There is some research suggesting links between inter-
vention outcomes and environmental factors such as socioeconomic status
maternal IQ and maternal educational level (Chan et al 1998) Wider
networks of family friends and teachers are also important environmental
influences
Societal attitudes towards children adolescents and adults with speech
impairments are frequently negative (Crowe Hall 1991 Madison 1992
Silverman and Falk 1992) For example Silverman and Paulus (1989)
compared childrenrsquos attitudes towards a child who uses=w=for=r=with a typical
speaker The child with the mild speech impairment was considered to be less
talkative and hear less well than his=her peers dysfluent unpleasant to listen
to soft boring dull more tense nervous afraid handicapped isolated
uncomfortable Further Anderson and Antonak (1992) found that social
acceptance of an actor with a mild speech sound impairment was less
positive than the same actor demonstrating a physical disability Research
by Felsenfeld et al (1992) adds another dimension people with speech
impairment were found to be less extroverted and socialized with fewer
people than people with typical speech development Clearly people with
speech impairment may be compromised by societal attitudes necessitating
goals directed towards society as well as working at the impairment level
The services systems and policies relating to individual children are as
varied as each individual and can influence the type of schooling the child
receives the type and amount of support the child receives at school whether
a child is eligible for SLT intervention and so forth Political factors can affect
the actuality of intervention for individual clients For example in some health
sectors within the USA the politicization of health care dictates the number of
SLT sessions a person with a particular impairment can receive Philosophical
210 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
attitudes toward the labelling of a child with a speech or language impairment
can influence the type of goals developed for a child (Christensen and Baker
2002 Green and Kostogriz 2002) For example McDermott (1993 272) has
argued that lsquothere is no such thing as LD [Learning Disability] only a social
practice of displaying noticing documenting remediating and explaining itrsquo
McLeod (2003) described the distinction between the use of the terms
lsquonormalrsquo and lsquotypicalrsquo and SLTsrsquo role in the categorization of children along
the normalndashabnormal divide Simmons-Mackie (2001) described differing
clinical assumptions leading to differing intervention approaches A childrsquos
experiences of receiving intervention from different people with differing
clinical assumptions is documented by Kovarsky (2001) Thus services
systems and policies can play a role in goal setting for children with speech
impairment
Personal factors
Attached to every lsquospeech impairmentrsquo is a real child (Bleile 1991) His or her
unique makeup must be considered within his=her cultural milieu in order to
determine the most appropriate intervention goals The ICF (WHO 2001 8)
recognizes the lsquolarge social and cultural variancersquo including gender age other
health conditions coping style social background education profession past
experience and character style Currently research into typically developing
children has demonstrated the wide range of individual differences (for
example McLeod et al 2001) For children with speech impairment there
are some case studies documenting the effect of personal factors on appro-
priate goal setting and intervention outcomes For example Kamhi (2000)
describes the progress of phonological intervention with his daughter Franne
Frannersquos lsquostubbornnessrsquo and desire to communicate with her parents led to
delineation between speech sound practice with her SLT and meaningful
communication with her parents He writes lsquoFrannersquos reluctance to practise
speech sounds was her way to let us know that we should focus on what
she said when she spoke rather than on how she said itrsquo (Kamhi 2000 183)
One important and documented factor to consider in the selection of speech
goals is the childrsquos personal ability to evaluate his=her speech Self-evaluation
occurs when the child judges the accuracy of his=her response prior to explicit
feedback from the clinician (cf Koegel et al 1986) lsquoSelf-evaluation appears
to be a central concept within diverse theoretical views of normal speech
development and within approaches to and explications of successful
interventionrsquo (Shriberg and Kwiatkowski 1987 154) Thus SLTs can incor-
porate self-evaluation within the intervention goals
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 211
Conclusion What goals are appropriate
It can be argued that the ultimate goal of speech intervention is to bring about
correct production of speech sounds resulting in intelligible conversational
speech within a childrsquos milieu (cf Kamhi 2000 Powell 1991) However
other similarly important goals may be to enhance a childrsquos participation in
social interaction to increase self-esteem or to decrease negative societal
attitudes towards people with speech impairment The ICF is a meta-theory
that allows for consideration of all these possibilities and is enhanced by
collaboration between SLTs and teachers A summary of possible goals
relating to the ICF is provided in Table 1 The most important outcome of
the present discussion is to reiterate that every child is unique requiring a
different approach to best meet their needs (Lowe 1994) Thus it is important
to consider all the factors before making a decision then to devise goals in
consultation and monitor progress (see Baker and McLeod this issue)
Continual revision and consultation will result in appropriate outcomes for
individual children as well as society
References
American Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Scope of practice in
speech-language pathology Rockville MD ASHA
Anderson R J and Antonak R F 1992 The influence of attitudes and
contact on reactions to persons with physical and speech disabilities
Rehabilitation Counselling Bulletin 35 240ndash47
Anthony A Bogle D Ingram T T S and McIsaac M W 1971 The
Edinburgh articulation test Edinburgh E and S Livingstone
Baker E and McLeod S 2004 Evidence-based management of children with
phonological impairment of unknown origin Child Language Teaching
and Therapy 20 261ndash85
Ball M J Gracco V and Stone M 2001 A comparison of imaging
techniques for the investigation of normal and disordered speech produc-
tion Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 313ndash24
Bernhardt B H and Stemberger J P 2000 Workbook in nonlinear phonology
for clinical application Austin TX ProEd
Bernthal J E and Bankson N W 1998 Articulation and phonological
disorders 4th edition Boston Allyn and Bacon
Bleile K M 1991 Individual differences In Bleile K M editor Child
phonology a book of exercises for students San Diego CA Singular 57ndash71
212 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Bleile K M 1995 Manual of articulation and phonological disorders San
Diego CA Singular
Bourgeois M S 1998 Functional outcome assessment of adults with
dementia Seminars in Speech and Hearing 19 261ndash75
Bowen C 2004 Child Language Teaching and Therapy 20 245ndash60
Campbell T F Dollaghan C A Rockette H E Paradise J L Feldman H
M Shriberg L D Sabo D L and Kurs-Lasky M 2003 Risk factors
for speech delay of unknown origin in 3-year-old children Child
Development 74 346ndash57
Chan A McAllister L and Wilson L 1998 An investigation of the agendash
MLU relationship and factors which predict MLU in two and three year
old Australian children Asia Pacific Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing 3 97ndash108
Christensen C A and Baker C D 2002 Pedagogy observation and
the construction of learning disability Pedagogy Culture and Society
10 73ndash93
Crowe Hall B J 1991 Attitudes of fourth and sixth graders toward peers with
mild articulation disorders Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 22 334ndash40
Duchan J F 2001a Impairment and social views of speech-language
pathology clinical practices re-examined Advances in Speech-Language
Pathology 3 37ndash46
Duchan J F 2001b Social and impairment approaches viewed in a forest and
in the shadows of a city street Advances in Speech-Language Pathology
3 73ndash79
Eadie T L 2003 The ICF A proposed framework for comprehensive
rehabilitation of individuals who use alaryngeal speech American
Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 12 189ndash97
Elbert M and Gierut J A 1986 Handbook of clinical phonology
approaches to assessment and treatment London Taylor amp Francis
Enderby P and John A 1997 Therapy outcome measures speech-language
pathology technical manual London Singular
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1992 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder linguistic
and personality results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35
1114ndash25
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1994 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder educational
and occupational results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37
1341ndash53
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 213
Flipsen P Shriberg L D Weismer G Karlsson H B and McSweeny J L
2001 Acoustic phenotypes for speech-genetics studies reference data for
residual =3= distortions Clinical Linguistics and Phonetics 15 603ndash30
Gibbon F E 1999 Undifferentiated lingual gestures in children with
articulation=phonological disorders Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing Research 42 382ndash97
Gierut J A 1998 Treatment efficacy functional phonological disorders in
children Journal of Speech Language Hearing Research 41 S85ndash100
Gierut J A Morrisette M L Hughes M T and Rowland S 1996
Phonological treatment efficacy and developmental norms Language
Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 27 215ndash30
Gillon G T 2000 The efficacy of phonological awareness intervention for
children with spoken language impairment Language Speech and Hear-
ing Services in Schools 31 126ndash41
Goldman R and Fristoe M 1986 Goldman Fristoe Test of Articulation
Revised Circle Pines MN American Guidance Service
Green B and Kostogriz A 2002 Learning difficulties and the new literacy
studies a socially critical perspective In Soler J Wearmouth J and
Reid G editors Contextualising difficulties in literacy development
exploring politics culture ethnicity and ethics Milton Keynes The Open
University
Griffin S Wilson L Clark L and McLeod S 2001 Speech pathology
applications of automatic speech recognition technology In Wilson L
and Hewat S editors Proceedings of the 2001 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
293ndash99
Golding-Kushner K 1995 Treatment of articulation and resonance disorders
associated with cleft palate and VPI In Shprintzen R and Bardach J
editors Cleft palate speech management a multidisciplinary approach
St Louis Mosby 327ndash63
Harasty J and Reed V A 1994 The prevalence of speech and language
impairment in two Sydney metropolitan schools Australian Journal of
Human Communication Disorders 22 1ndash23
Harding A and Grunwell P 1998 Active versus passive cleft-type speech
characteristics International Journal of Language and Communication
Disorders 33 329ndash52
Hersh D 1999 Impairment to empowerment social model theory and
aphasia therapy In McLeod S and McAllister L editors Proceedings
of the 1999 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 125ndash30
214 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Hodge M 1983 Assessment and treatment of a child with a developmental
speech disorder a biological behavioural perspective Seminars in Speech
and Language 14 128ndash41
Hodson B W 1994 Helping individuals become intelligible literate and
articulate the role of phonology Topics in Language Disorders 14 1ndash16
Hodson B W and Paden E P 1981 Phonological processes which
characterize unintelligible and intelligible speech in early childhood
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 46 369ndash73
James D van Doorn J and McLeod S 2002 Segment production in mono-
di- and polysyllabic words in children aged 3ndash7 years In Windsor F
Kelly L and Hewlett N editors Themes in Clinical Phonetics and
Linguistics Hillsdale NJ Lawrence Erlbaum 287ndash98
Jordan L and Kaiser W 1996 Aphasia a social approach London
Chapman and Hall
Kamhi A G 2000 Practice makes perfect the incompatibility of practicing
speech and meaningful communication Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 31 182ndash85
Kent R D Miolo G and Bloedel S 1994 The intelligibility of childrenrsquos
speech a review of evaluation procedures American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 3 81ndash95
Koegel L K Koegel R L and Costello-Ingham J 1986 Programming
rapid generalization of correct articulation through self-monitoring proce-
dures Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 24ndash32
Kovarsky D 2001 Ruminating on impairments-based assessment and inter-
vention Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 59ndash62
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1992 Intelligibility assessment in
developmental phonological disorders accuracy of caregiver gloss
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35 1095ndash1104
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1993 Speech normalization in develop-
mental phonological disorders a retrospective study of capability-focus
theory Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 24 10ndash18
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1998 The capability-focus treatment
framework for child speech disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 7 27ndash38
Lai C S L Fisher S E Hurst J A Vargha-Khadem F and Monaco A P
2001 A forkhead-domain gene is mutated in severe speech and language
disorder Nature 413 519ndash23
Larrivee L S and Catts H W 1999 Early reading achievement in children
with expressive phonological disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 8 118ndash28
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 215
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
speech impairment include speaking conversation learning and applying
knowledge interpersonal interactions and relationships community social
and civic life Each of these will be addressed with relation to children with
speech impairment
Within the last decade SLTs have appropriated measures of activity and
participation that consider (to some extent) the social impact of speaking and
conversation One measure of activity that has been formalized as an assess-
ment practice is the level of intelligibility (Bleile 1995 Kent et al 1994
Kwiatkowski and Shriberg 1992) The Childrenrsquos Speech Intelligibility
Measure (Wilcox and Morris 1999) is one commercially available sampling
tool to quantify the extent of intelligibility of individual childrenrsquos speech by
untrained listeners There are few examples of ways in which SLTs consider
participation within speaking and conversation by children with speech
impairment One example is the Therapy Outcomes Measure (Enderby and
John 1997) which includes a specific subsection on childrenrsquos speech
Consideration of activities and participation also includes the influence of
the impairment on learning and applying knowledge With the high co-
occurrence of children with speech impairments having reading and spelling
difficulties (Larrivee and Catts 1999) it is essential that goals are developed
around the facilitation of academic skills (Hodson 1994) Intervention
targeting phonological awareness should accompany speech intervention
(Gillon 2000) Partnerships between teachers and SLTs are essential for
appropriate goal setting to facilitate successful oral and literate communicative
skills throughout the lives of these children
Further SLTs and teachers can consider interpersonal interactions and
relationships in their intervention planning for children with speech impair-
ment Pertinent social assessment practices may consist of a discussion with
the child his=her parents siblings friends grandparents and other significant
people to ascertain social goals and barriers interests and hopes (Duchan
2001a) Pretty (1995) suggested a number of goals congruent with a social
model for a four-year old girl with severe speech impairment The goals
focused on the interpersonal interactions and relationships with her family
teacher friends peers and peersrsquo parents For example the teacher and SLT
collaborated to promote communicative success at preschool including
strategies to repair communication breakdowns encouraging a group of her
peers to ask for repetition when they did not understand BJ or to ask BJ to
lsquoshow mersquo BJrsquos family were encouraged to look at her when she spoke to them
use all available cues (for example maintaining a diary of significant events
that she may want to communicate) and keep a list of BJrsquos pronunciations of
important words (for example the name of her best friend) These goals based
208 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
on activity and participation can readily be adapted for any child with a speech
impairment
Finally consideration of community social and civic life of children with
speech impairment is rarely discussed However there is scope for socially
based intervention goals to facilitate activity and participation in this context
Friends can be encouraged to spend time talking and babbling with a baby
who has a craniofacial anomaly in order to develop social interactions despite
the fact that the child may look different and have reduced time for social
interaction due to the extensive amount of time spent feeding Another
example of a social goal for people with a hearing impairment would consist
of public education to decrease background noise and to encourage people to
look at a person with a hearing impairment while talking with them
When considering activity and participation the ICF allows for comparison
between performance and capacity There may be a mismatch between a
childrsquos performance within their daily lives and their communicative capacity
on standardized speech assessment tools At times children are more capable
within the confines of a standardized assessment than they demonstrate within
the complex communicative demands of the classroom At other times
children exhibit a variety of compensatory strategies to minimize commu-
nicative difficulty that is evident on standardized assessment tasks Considera-
tion of performance and capacity is an important component within the
capability focus model described by Kwiatkowski and Shriberg (1993
1998) who have successfully tested this with hundreds of children who
have received speech intervention Even while undertaking standardized
assessment tools there may be a mismatch between performance on one
versus another demonstrating the mismatch between performance and capa-
city Some areas of difference include single word versus connected speech
(McLeod et al 1994 Morrison and Shriberg 1992) imitated versus sponta-
neous speech (Leonard et al 1978) stimulable versus nonstimulable sounds
(Powell and Miccio 1996) monosyllabic versus polysyllabic words (James et
al 2002) The difference between a childrsquos communicative performance and
capacity should be considered when developing appropriate goals
Contextual factors
Environmental factors
Some of the environmental factors mentioned by WHO that relate to children
with speech impairment include products and technology support and
relationships attitudes and services systems and policies
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 209
There is a burgeoning industry of products and technology utilizing speech-
activated devices for tasks such as computer operation word processing home
banking navigation and telephone directory assistance Intelligible speech is
essential for the use of speech-activated devices and can place restrictions on
the lives of adults who have residual speech impairments (Griffin et al 2001)
While children with speech impairment currently are not affected by this
technology if intelligible speech is not achieved by adulthood incorporation
within future society may be limited Further with the advances of technology
it is possible that speech-activated devices may be a common part of living for
children and adults alike
Probably the most important environmental factor relating to children with
speech impairment is support and relationships The incorporation of parental
support into the intervention practices is frequently a key to success (see
Bowen this issue) There is some research suggesting links between inter-
vention outcomes and environmental factors such as socioeconomic status
maternal IQ and maternal educational level (Chan et al 1998) Wider
networks of family friends and teachers are also important environmental
influences
Societal attitudes towards children adolescents and adults with speech
impairments are frequently negative (Crowe Hall 1991 Madison 1992
Silverman and Falk 1992) For example Silverman and Paulus (1989)
compared childrenrsquos attitudes towards a child who uses=w=for=r=with a typical
speaker The child with the mild speech impairment was considered to be less
talkative and hear less well than his=her peers dysfluent unpleasant to listen
to soft boring dull more tense nervous afraid handicapped isolated
uncomfortable Further Anderson and Antonak (1992) found that social
acceptance of an actor with a mild speech sound impairment was less
positive than the same actor demonstrating a physical disability Research
by Felsenfeld et al (1992) adds another dimension people with speech
impairment were found to be less extroverted and socialized with fewer
people than people with typical speech development Clearly people with
speech impairment may be compromised by societal attitudes necessitating
goals directed towards society as well as working at the impairment level
The services systems and policies relating to individual children are as
varied as each individual and can influence the type of schooling the child
receives the type and amount of support the child receives at school whether
a child is eligible for SLT intervention and so forth Political factors can affect
the actuality of intervention for individual clients For example in some health
sectors within the USA the politicization of health care dictates the number of
SLT sessions a person with a particular impairment can receive Philosophical
210 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
attitudes toward the labelling of a child with a speech or language impairment
can influence the type of goals developed for a child (Christensen and Baker
2002 Green and Kostogriz 2002) For example McDermott (1993 272) has
argued that lsquothere is no such thing as LD [Learning Disability] only a social
practice of displaying noticing documenting remediating and explaining itrsquo
McLeod (2003) described the distinction between the use of the terms
lsquonormalrsquo and lsquotypicalrsquo and SLTsrsquo role in the categorization of children along
the normalndashabnormal divide Simmons-Mackie (2001) described differing
clinical assumptions leading to differing intervention approaches A childrsquos
experiences of receiving intervention from different people with differing
clinical assumptions is documented by Kovarsky (2001) Thus services
systems and policies can play a role in goal setting for children with speech
impairment
Personal factors
Attached to every lsquospeech impairmentrsquo is a real child (Bleile 1991) His or her
unique makeup must be considered within his=her cultural milieu in order to
determine the most appropriate intervention goals The ICF (WHO 2001 8)
recognizes the lsquolarge social and cultural variancersquo including gender age other
health conditions coping style social background education profession past
experience and character style Currently research into typically developing
children has demonstrated the wide range of individual differences (for
example McLeod et al 2001) For children with speech impairment there
are some case studies documenting the effect of personal factors on appro-
priate goal setting and intervention outcomes For example Kamhi (2000)
describes the progress of phonological intervention with his daughter Franne
Frannersquos lsquostubbornnessrsquo and desire to communicate with her parents led to
delineation between speech sound practice with her SLT and meaningful
communication with her parents He writes lsquoFrannersquos reluctance to practise
speech sounds was her way to let us know that we should focus on what
she said when she spoke rather than on how she said itrsquo (Kamhi 2000 183)
One important and documented factor to consider in the selection of speech
goals is the childrsquos personal ability to evaluate his=her speech Self-evaluation
occurs when the child judges the accuracy of his=her response prior to explicit
feedback from the clinician (cf Koegel et al 1986) lsquoSelf-evaluation appears
to be a central concept within diverse theoretical views of normal speech
development and within approaches to and explications of successful
interventionrsquo (Shriberg and Kwiatkowski 1987 154) Thus SLTs can incor-
porate self-evaluation within the intervention goals
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 211
Conclusion What goals are appropriate
It can be argued that the ultimate goal of speech intervention is to bring about
correct production of speech sounds resulting in intelligible conversational
speech within a childrsquos milieu (cf Kamhi 2000 Powell 1991) However
other similarly important goals may be to enhance a childrsquos participation in
social interaction to increase self-esteem or to decrease negative societal
attitudes towards people with speech impairment The ICF is a meta-theory
that allows for consideration of all these possibilities and is enhanced by
collaboration between SLTs and teachers A summary of possible goals
relating to the ICF is provided in Table 1 The most important outcome of
the present discussion is to reiterate that every child is unique requiring a
different approach to best meet their needs (Lowe 1994) Thus it is important
to consider all the factors before making a decision then to devise goals in
consultation and monitor progress (see Baker and McLeod this issue)
Continual revision and consultation will result in appropriate outcomes for
individual children as well as society
References
American Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Scope of practice in
speech-language pathology Rockville MD ASHA
Anderson R J and Antonak R F 1992 The influence of attitudes and
contact on reactions to persons with physical and speech disabilities
Rehabilitation Counselling Bulletin 35 240ndash47
Anthony A Bogle D Ingram T T S and McIsaac M W 1971 The
Edinburgh articulation test Edinburgh E and S Livingstone
Baker E and McLeod S 2004 Evidence-based management of children with
phonological impairment of unknown origin Child Language Teaching
and Therapy 20 261ndash85
Ball M J Gracco V and Stone M 2001 A comparison of imaging
techniques for the investigation of normal and disordered speech produc-
tion Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 313ndash24
Bernhardt B H and Stemberger J P 2000 Workbook in nonlinear phonology
for clinical application Austin TX ProEd
Bernthal J E and Bankson N W 1998 Articulation and phonological
disorders 4th edition Boston Allyn and Bacon
Bleile K M 1991 Individual differences In Bleile K M editor Child
phonology a book of exercises for students San Diego CA Singular 57ndash71
212 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Bleile K M 1995 Manual of articulation and phonological disorders San
Diego CA Singular
Bourgeois M S 1998 Functional outcome assessment of adults with
dementia Seminars in Speech and Hearing 19 261ndash75
Bowen C 2004 Child Language Teaching and Therapy 20 245ndash60
Campbell T F Dollaghan C A Rockette H E Paradise J L Feldman H
M Shriberg L D Sabo D L and Kurs-Lasky M 2003 Risk factors
for speech delay of unknown origin in 3-year-old children Child
Development 74 346ndash57
Chan A McAllister L and Wilson L 1998 An investigation of the agendash
MLU relationship and factors which predict MLU in two and three year
old Australian children Asia Pacific Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing 3 97ndash108
Christensen C A and Baker C D 2002 Pedagogy observation and
the construction of learning disability Pedagogy Culture and Society
10 73ndash93
Crowe Hall B J 1991 Attitudes of fourth and sixth graders toward peers with
mild articulation disorders Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 22 334ndash40
Duchan J F 2001a Impairment and social views of speech-language
pathology clinical practices re-examined Advances in Speech-Language
Pathology 3 37ndash46
Duchan J F 2001b Social and impairment approaches viewed in a forest and
in the shadows of a city street Advances in Speech-Language Pathology
3 73ndash79
Eadie T L 2003 The ICF A proposed framework for comprehensive
rehabilitation of individuals who use alaryngeal speech American
Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 12 189ndash97
Elbert M and Gierut J A 1986 Handbook of clinical phonology
approaches to assessment and treatment London Taylor amp Francis
Enderby P and John A 1997 Therapy outcome measures speech-language
pathology technical manual London Singular
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1992 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder linguistic
and personality results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35
1114ndash25
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1994 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder educational
and occupational results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37
1341ndash53
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 213
Flipsen P Shriberg L D Weismer G Karlsson H B and McSweeny J L
2001 Acoustic phenotypes for speech-genetics studies reference data for
residual =3= distortions Clinical Linguistics and Phonetics 15 603ndash30
Gibbon F E 1999 Undifferentiated lingual gestures in children with
articulation=phonological disorders Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing Research 42 382ndash97
Gierut J A 1998 Treatment efficacy functional phonological disorders in
children Journal of Speech Language Hearing Research 41 S85ndash100
Gierut J A Morrisette M L Hughes M T and Rowland S 1996
Phonological treatment efficacy and developmental norms Language
Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 27 215ndash30
Gillon G T 2000 The efficacy of phonological awareness intervention for
children with spoken language impairment Language Speech and Hear-
ing Services in Schools 31 126ndash41
Goldman R and Fristoe M 1986 Goldman Fristoe Test of Articulation
Revised Circle Pines MN American Guidance Service
Green B and Kostogriz A 2002 Learning difficulties and the new literacy
studies a socially critical perspective In Soler J Wearmouth J and
Reid G editors Contextualising difficulties in literacy development
exploring politics culture ethnicity and ethics Milton Keynes The Open
University
Griffin S Wilson L Clark L and McLeod S 2001 Speech pathology
applications of automatic speech recognition technology In Wilson L
and Hewat S editors Proceedings of the 2001 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
293ndash99
Golding-Kushner K 1995 Treatment of articulation and resonance disorders
associated with cleft palate and VPI In Shprintzen R and Bardach J
editors Cleft palate speech management a multidisciplinary approach
St Louis Mosby 327ndash63
Harasty J and Reed V A 1994 The prevalence of speech and language
impairment in two Sydney metropolitan schools Australian Journal of
Human Communication Disorders 22 1ndash23
Harding A and Grunwell P 1998 Active versus passive cleft-type speech
characteristics International Journal of Language and Communication
Disorders 33 329ndash52
Hersh D 1999 Impairment to empowerment social model theory and
aphasia therapy In McLeod S and McAllister L editors Proceedings
of the 1999 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 125ndash30
214 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Hodge M 1983 Assessment and treatment of a child with a developmental
speech disorder a biological behavioural perspective Seminars in Speech
and Language 14 128ndash41
Hodson B W 1994 Helping individuals become intelligible literate and
articulate the role of phonology Topics in Language Disorders 14 1ndash16
Hodson B W and Paden E P 1981 Phonological processes which
characterize unintelligible and intelligible speech in early childhood
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 46 369ndash73
James D van Doorn J and McLeod S 2002 Segment production in mono-
di- and polysyllabic words in children aged 3ndash7 years In Windsor F
Kelly L and Hewlett N editors Themes in Clinical Phonetics and
Linguistics Hillsdale NJ Lawrence Erlbaum 287ndash98
Jordan L and Kaiser W 1996 Aphasia a social approach London
Chapman and Hall
Kamhi A G 2000 Practice makes perfect the incompatibility of practicing
speech and meaningful communication Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 31 182ndash85
Kent R D Miolo G and Bloedel S 1994 The intelligibility of childrenrsquos
speech a review of evaluation procedures American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 3 81ndash95
Koegel L K Koegel R L and Costello-Ingham J 1986 Programming
rapid generalization of correct articulation through self-monitoring proce-
dures Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 24ndash32
Kovarsky D 2001 Ruminating on impairments-based assessment and inter-
vention Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 59ndash62
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1992 Intelligibility assessment in
developmental phonological disorders accuracy of caregiver gloss
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35 1095ndash1104
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1993 Speech normalization in develop-
mental phonological disorders a retrospective study of capability-focus
theory Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 24 10ndash18
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1998 The capability-focus treatment
framework for child speech disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 7 27ndash38
Lai C S L Fisher S E Hurst J A Vargha-Khadem F and Monaco A P
2001 A forkhead-domain gene is mutated in severe speech and language
disorder Nature 413 519ndash23
Larrivee L S and Catts H W 1999 Early reading achievement in children
with expressive phonological disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 8 118ndash28
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 215
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
on activity and participation can readily be adapted for any child with a speech
impairment
Finally consideration of community social and civic life of children with
speech impairment is rarely discussed However there is scope for socially
based intervention goals to facilitate activity and participation in this context
Friends can be encouraged to spend time talking and babbling with a baby
who has a craniofacial anomaly in order to develop social interactions despite
the fact that the child may look different and have reduced time for social
interaction due to the extensive amount of time spent feeding Another
example of a social goal for people with a hearing impairment would consist
of public education to decrease background noise and to encourage people to
look at a person with a hearing impairment while talking with them
When considering activity and participation the ICF allows for comparison
between performance and capacity There may be a mismatch between a
childrsquos performance within their daily lives and their communicative capacity
on standardized speech assessment tools At times children are more capable
within the confines of a standardized assessment than they demonstrate within
the complex communicative demands of the classroom At other times
children exhibit a variety of compensatory strategies to minimize commu-
nicative difficulty that is evident on standardized assessment tasks Considera-
tion of performance and capacity is an important component within the
capability focus model described by Kwiatkowski and Shriberg (1993
1998) who have successfully tested this with hundreds of children who
have received speech intervention Even while undertaking standardized
assessment tools there may be a mismatch between performance on one
versus another demonstrating the mismatch between performance and capa-
city Some areas of difference include single word versus connected speech
(McLeod et al 1994 Morrison and Shriberg 1992) imitated versus sponta-
neous speech (Leonard et al 1978) stimulable versus nonstimulable sounds
(Powell and Miccio 1996) monosyllabic versus polysyllabic words (James et
al 2002) The difference between a childrsquos communicative performance and
capacity should be considered when developing appropriate goals
Contextual factors
Environmental factors
Some of the environmental factors mentioned by WHO that relate to children
with speech impairment include products and technology support and
relationships attitudes and services systems and policies
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 209
There is a burgeoning industry of products and technology utilizing speech-
activated devices for tasks such as computer operation word processing home
banking navigation and telephone directory assistance Intelligible speech is
essential for the use of speech-activated devices and can place restrictions on
the lives of adults who have residual speech impairments (Griffin et al 2001)
While children with speech impairment currently are not affected by this
technology if intelligible speech is not achieved by adulthood incorporation
within future society may be limited Further with the advances of technology
it is possible that speech-activated devices may be a common part of living for
children and adults alike
Probably the most important environmental factor relating to children with
speech impairment is support and relationships The incorporation of parental
support into the intervention practices is frequently a key to success (see
Bowen this issue) There is some research suggesting links between inter-
vention outcomes and environmental factors such as socioeconomic status
maternal IQ and maternal educational level (Chan et al 1998) Wider
networks of family friends and teachers are also important environmental
influences
Societal attitudes towards children adolescents and adults with speech
impairments are frequently negative (Crowe Hall 1991 Madison 1992
Silverman and Falk 1992) For example Silverman and Paulus (1989)
compared childrenrsquos attitudes towards a child who uses=w=for=r=with a typical
speaker The child with the mild speech impairment was considered to be less
talkative and hear less well than his=her peers dysfluent unpleasant to listen
to soft boring dull more tense nervous afraid handicapped isolated
uncomfortable Further Anderson and Antonak (1992) found that social
acceptance of an actor with a mild speech sound impairment was less
positive than the same actor demonstrating a physical disability Research
by Felsenfeld et al (1992) adds another dimension people with speech
impairment were found to be less extroverted and socialized with fewer
people than people with typical speech development Clearly people with
speech impairment may be compromised by societal attitudes necessitating
goals directed towards society as well as working at the impairment level
The services systems and policies relating to individual children are as
varied as each individual and can influence the type of schooling the child
receives the type and amount of support the child receives at school whether
a child is eligible for SLT intervention and so forth Political factors can affect
the actuality of intervention for individual clients For example in some health
sectors within the USA the politicization of health care dictates the number of
SLT sessions a person with a particular impairment can receive Philosophical
210 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
attitudes toward the labelling of a child with a speech or language impairment
can influence the type of goals developed for a child (Christensen and Baker
2002 Green and Kostogriz 2002) For example McDermott (1993 272) has
argued that lsquothere is no such thing as LD [Learning Disability] only a social
practice of displaying noticing documenting remediating and explaining itrsquo
McLeod (2003) described the distinction between the use of the terms
lsquonormalrsquo and lsquotypicalrsquo and SLTsrsquo role in the categorization of children along
the normalndashabnormal divide Simmons-Mackie (2001) described differing
clinical assumptions leading to differing intervention approaches A childrsquos
experiences of receiving intervention from different people with differing
clinical assumptions is documented by Kovarsky (2001) Thus services
systems and policies can play a role in goal setting for children with speech
impairment
Personal factors
Attached to every lsquospeech impairmentrsquo is a real child (Bleile 1991) His or her
unique makeup must be considered within his=her cultural milieu in order to
determine the most appropriate intervention goals The ICF (WHO 2001 8)
recognizes the lsquolarge social and cultural variancersquo including gender age other
health conditions coping style social background education profession past
experience and character style Currently research into typically developing
children has demonstrated the wide range of individual differences (for
example McLeod et al 2001) For children with speech impairment there
are some case studies documenting the effect of personal factors on appro-
priate goal setting and intervention outcomes For example Kamhi (2000)
describes the progress of phonological intervention with his daughter Franne
Frannersquos lsquostubbornnessrsquo and desire to communicate with her parents led to
delineation between speech sound practice with her SLT and meaningful
communication with her parents He writes lsquoFrannersquos reluctance to practise
speech sounds was her way to let us know that we should focus on what
she said when she spoke rather than on how she said itrsquo (Kamhi 2000 183)
One important and documented factor to consider in the selection of speech
goals is the childrsquos personal ability to evaluate his=her speech Self-evaluation
occurs when the child judges the accuracy of his=her response prior to explicit
feedback from the clinician (cf Koegel et al 1986) lsquoSelf-evaluation appears
to be a central concept within diverse theoretical views of normal speech
development and within approaches to and explications of successful
interventionrsquo (Shriberg and Kwiatkowski 1987 154) Thus SLTs can incor-
porate self-evaluation within the intervention goals
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 211
Conclusion What goals are appropriate
It can be argued that the ultimate goal of speech intervention is to bring about
correct production of speech sounds resulting in intelligible conversational
speech within a childrsquos milieu (cf Kamhi 2000 Powell 1991) However
other similarly important goals may be to enhance a childrsquos participation in
social interaction to increase self-esteem or to decrease negative societal
attitudes towards people with speech impairment The ICF is a meta-theory
that allows for consideration of all these possibilities and is enhanced by
collaboration between SLTs and teachers A summary of possible goals
relating to the ICF is provided in Table 1 The most important outcome of
the present discussion is to reiterate that every child is unique requiring a
different approach to best meet their needs (Lowe 1994) Thus it is important
to consider all the factors before making a decision then to devise goals in
consultation and monitor progress (see Baker and McLeod this issue)
Continual revision and consultation will result in appropriate outcomes for
individual children as well as society
References
American Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Scope of practice in
speech-language pathology Rockville MD ASHA
Anderson R J and Antonak R F 1992 The influence of attitudes and
contact on reactions to persons with physical and speech disabilities
Rehabilitation Counselling Bulletin 35 240ndash47
Anthony A Bogle D Ingram T T S and McIsaac M W 1971 The
Edinburgh articulation test Edinburgh E and S Livingstone
Baker E and McLeod S 2004 Evidence-based management of children with
phonological impairment of unknown origin Child Language Teaching
and Therapy 20 261ndash85
Ball M J Gracco V and Stone M 2001 A comparison of imaging
techniques for the investigation of normal and disordered speech produc-
tion Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 313ndash24
Bernhardt B H and Stemberger J P 2000 Workbook in nonlinear phonology
for clinical application Austin TX ProEd
Bernthal J E and Bankson N W 1998 Articulation and phonological
disorders 4th edition Boston Allyn and Bacon
Bleile K M 1991 Individual differences In Bleile K M editor Child
phonology a book of exercises for students San Diego CA Singular 57ndash71
212 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Bleile K M 1995 Manual of articulation and phonological disorders San
Diego CA Singular
Bourgeois M S 1998 Functional outcome assessment of adults with
dementia Seminars in Speech and Hearing 19 261ndash75
Bowen C 2004 Child Language Teaching and Therapy 20 245ndash60
Campbell T F Dollaghan C A Rockette H E Paradise J L Feldman H
M Shriberg L D Sabo D L and Kurs-Lasky M 2003 Risk factors
for speech delay of unknown origin in 3-year-old children Child
Development 74 346ndash57
Chan A McAllister L and Wilson L 1998 An investigation of the agendash
MLU relationship and factors which predict MLU in two and three year
old Australian children Asia Pacific Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing 3 97ndash108
Christensen C A and Baker C D 2002 Pedagogy observation and
the construction of learning disability Pedagogy Culture and Society
10 73ndash93
Crowe Hall B J 1991 Attitudes of fourth and sixth graders toward peers with
mild articulation disorders Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 22 334ndash40
Duchan J F 2001a Impairment and social views of speech-language
pathology clinical practices re-examined Advances in Speech-Language
Pathology 3 37ndash46
Duchan J F 2001b Social and impairment approaches viewed in a forest and
in the shadows of a city street Advances in Speech-Language Pathology
3 73ndash79
Eadie T L 2003 The ICF A proposed framework for comprehensive
rehabilitation of individuals who use alaryngeal speech American
Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 12 189ndash97
Elbert M and Gierut J A 1986 Handbook of clinical phonology
approaches to assessment and treatment London Taylor amp Francis
Enderby P and John A 1997 Therapy outcome measures speech-language
pathology technical manual London Singular
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1992 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder linguistic
and personality results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35
1114ndash25
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1994 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder educational
and occupational results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37
1341ndash53
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 213
Flipsen P Shriberg L D Weismer G Karlsson H B and McSweeny J L
2001 Acoustic phenotypes for speech-genetics studies reference data for
residual =3= distortions Clinical Linguistics and Phonetics 15 603ndash30
Gibbon F E 1999 Undifferentiated lingual gestures in children with
articulation=phonological disorders Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing Research 42 382ndash97
Gierut J A 1998 Treatment efficacy functional phonological disorders in
children Journal of Speech Language Hearing Research 41 S85ndash100
Gierut J A Morrisette M L Hughes M T and Rowland S 1996
Phonological treatment efficacy and developmental norms Language
Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 27 215ndash30
Gillon G T 2000 The efficacy of phonological awareness intervention for
children with spoken language impairment Language Speech and Hear-
ing Services in Schools 31 126ndash41
Goldman R and Fristoe M 1986 Goldman Fristoe Test of Articulation
Revised Circle Pines MN American Guidance Service
Green B and Kostogriz A 2002 Learning difficulties and the new literacy
studies a socially critical perspective In Soler J Wearmouth J and
Reid G editors Contextualising difficulties in literacy development
exploring politics culture ethnicity and ethics Milton Keynes The Open
University
Griffin S Wilson L Clark L and McLeod S 2001 Speech pathology
applications of automatic speech recognition technology In Wilson L
and Hewat S editors Proceedings of the 2001 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
293ndash99
Golding-Kushner K 1995 Treatment of articulation and resonance disorders
associated with cleft palate and VPI In Shprintzen R and Bardach J
editors Cleft palate speech management a multidisciplinary approach
St Louis Mosby 327ndash63
Harasty J and Reed V A 1994 The prevalence of speech and language
impairment in two Sydney metropolitan schools Australian Journal of
Human Communication Disorders 22 1ndash23
Harding A and Grunwell P 1998 Active versus passive cleft-type speech
characteristics International Journal of Language and Communication
Disorders 33 329ndash52
Hersh D 1999 Impairment to empowerment social model theory and
aphasia therapy In McLeod S and McAllister L editors Proceedings
of the 1999 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 125ndash30
214 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Hodge M 1983 Assessment and treatment of a child with a developmental
speech disorder a biological behavioural perspective Seminars in Speech
and Language 14 128ndash41
Hodson B W 1994 Helping individuals become intelligible literate and
articulate the role of phonology Topics in Language Disorders 14 1ndash16
Hodson B W and Paden E P 1981 Phonological processes which
characterize unintelligible and intelligible speech in early childhood
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 46 369ndash73
James D van Doorn J and McLeod S 2002 Segment production in mono-
di- and polysyllabic words in children aged 3ndash7 years In Windsor F
Kelly L and Hewlett N editors Themes in Clinical Phonetics and
Linguistics Hillsdale NJ Lawrence Erlbaum 287ndash98
Jordan L and Kaiser W 1996 Aphasia a social approach London
Chapman and Hall
Kamhi A G 2000 Practice makes perfect the incompatibility of practicing
speech and meaningful communication Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 31 182ndash85
Kent R D Miolo G and Bloedel S 1994 The intelligibility of childrenrsquos
speech a review of evaluation procedures American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 3 81ndash95
Koegel L K Koegel R L and Costello-Ingham J 1986 Programming
rapid generalization of correct articulation through self-monitoring proce-
dures Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 24ndash32
Kovarsky D 2001 Ruminating on impairments-based assessment and inter-
vention Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 59ndash62
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1992 Intelligibility assessment in
developmental phonological disorders accuracy of caregiver gloss
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35 1095ndash1104
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1993 Speech normalization in develop-
mental phonological disorders a retrospective study of capability-focus
theory Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 24 10ndash18
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1998 The capability-focus treatment
framework for child speech disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 7 27ndash38
Lai C S L Fisher S E Hurst J A Vargha-Khadem F and Monaco A P
2001 A forkhead-domain gene is mutated in severe speech and language
disorder Nature 413 519ndash23
Larrivee L S and Catts H W 1999 Early reading achievement in children
with expressive phonological disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 8 118ndash28
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 215
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
There is a burgeoning industry of products and technology utilizing speech-
activated devices for tasks such as computer operation word processing home
banking navigation and telephone directory assistance Intelligible speech is
essential for the use of speech-activated devices and can place restrictions on
the lives of adults who have residual speech impairments (Griffin et al 2001)
While children with speech impairment currently are not affected by this
technology if intelligible speech is not achieved by adulthood incorporation
within future society may be limited Further with the advances of technology
it is possible that speech-activated devices may be a common part of living for
children and adults alike
Probably the most important environmental factor relating to children with
speech impairment is support and relationships The incorporation of parental
support into the intervention practices is frequently a key to success (see
Bowen this issue) There is some research suggesting links between inter-
vention outcomes and environmental factors such as socioeconomic status
maternal IQ and maternal educational level (Chan et al 1998) Wider
networks of family friends and teachers are also important environmental
influences
Societal attitudes towards children adolescents and adults with speech
impairments are frequently negative (Crowe Hall 1991 Madison 1992
Silverman and Falk 1992) For example Silverman and Paulus (1989)
compared childrenrsquos attitudes towards a child who uses=w=for=r=with a typical
speaker The child with the mild speech impairment was considered to be less
talkative and hear less well than his=her peers dysfluent unpleasant to listen
to soft boring dull more tense nervous afraid handicapped isolated
uncomfortable Further Anderson and Antonak (1992) found that social
acceptance of an actor with a mild speech sound impairment was less
positive than the same actor demonstrating a physical disability Research
by Felsenfeld et al (1992) adds another dimension people with speech
impairment were found to be less extroverted and socialized with fewer
people than people with typical speech development Clearly people with
speech impairment may be compromised by societal attitudes necessitating
goals directed towards society as well as working at the impairment level
The services systems and policies relating to individual children are as
varied as each individual and can influence the type of schooling the child
receives the type and amount of support the child receives at school whether
a child is eligible for SLT intervention and so forth Political factors can affect
the actuality of intervention for individual clients For example in some health
sectors within the USA the politicization of health care dictates the number of
SLT sessions a person with a particular impairment can receive Philosophical
210 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
attitudes toward the labelling of a child with a speech or language impairment
can influence the type of goals developed for a child (Christensen and Baker
2002 Green and Kostogriz 2002) For example McDermott (1993 272) has
argued that lsquothere is no such thing as LD [Learning Disability] only a social
practice of displaying noticing documenting remediating and explaining itrsquo
McLeod (2003) described the distinction between the use of the terms
lsquonormalrsquo and lsquotypicalrsquo and SLTsrsquo role in the categorization of children along
the normalndashabnormal divide Simmons-Mackie (2001) described differing
clinical assumptions leading to differing intervention approaches A childrsquos
experiences of receiving intervention from different people with differing
clinical assumptions is documented by Kovarsky (2001) Thus services
systems and policies can play a role in goal setting for children with speech
impairment
Personal factors
Attached to every lsquospeech impairmentrsquo is a real child (Bleile 1991) His or her
unique makeup must be considered within his=her cultural milieu in order to
determine the most appropriate intervention goals The ICF (WHO 2001 8)
recognizes the lsquolarge social and cultural variancersquo including gender age other
health conditions coping style social background education profession past
experience and character style Currently research into typically developing
children has demonstrated the wide range of individual differences (for
example McLeod et al 2001) For children with speech impairment there
are some case studies documenting the effect of personal factors on appro-
priate goal setting and intervention outcomes For example Kamhi (2000)
describes the progress of phonological intervention with his daughter Franne
Frannersquos lsquostubbornnessrsquo and desire to communicate with her parents led to
delineation between speech sound practice with her SLT and meaningful
communication with her parents He writes lsquoFrannersquos reluctance to practise
speech sounds was her way to let us know that we should focus on what
she said when she spoke rather than on how she said itrsquo (Kamhi 2000 183)
One important and documented factor to consider in the selection of speech
goals is the childrsquos personal ability to evaluate his=her speech Self-evaluation
occurs when the child judges the accuracy of his=her response prior to explicit
feedback from the clinician (cf Koegel et al 1986) lsquoSelf-evaluation appears
to be a central concept within diverse theoretical views of normal speech
development and within approaches to and explications of successful
interventionrsquo (Shriberg and Kwiatkowski 1987 154) Thus SLTs can incor-
porate self-evaluation within the intervention goals
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 211
Conclusion What goals are appropriate
It can be argued that the ultimate goal of speech intervention is to bring about
correct production of speech sounds resulting in intelligible conversational
speech within a childrsquos milieu (cf Kamhi 2000 Powell 1991) However
other similarly important goals may be to enhance a childrsquos participation in
social interaction to increase self-esteem or to decrease negative societal
attitudes towards people with speech impairment The ICF is a meta-theory
that allows for consideration of all these possibilities and is enhanced by
collaboration between SLTs and teachers A summary of possible goals
relating to the ICF is provided in Table 1 The most important outcome of
the present discussion is to reiterate that every child is unique requiring a
different approach to best meet their needs (Lowe 1994) Thus it is important
to consider all the factors before making a decision then to devise goals in
consultation and monitor progress (see Baker and McLeod this issue)
Continual revision and consultation will result in appropriate outcomes for
individual children as well as society
References
American Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Scope of practice in
speech-language pathology Rockville MD ASHA
Anderson R J and Antonak R F 1992 The influence of attitudes and
contact on reactions to persons with physical and speech disabilities
Rehabilitation Counselling Bulletin 35 240ndash47
Anthony A Bogle D Ingram T T S and McIsaac M W 1971 The
Edinburgh articulation test Edinburgh E and S Livingstone
Baker E and McLeod S 2004 Evidence-based management of children with
phonological impairment of unknown origin Child Language Teaching
and Therapy 20 261ndash85
Ball M J Gracco V and Stone M 2001 A comparison of imaging
techniques for the investigation of normal and disordered speech produc-
tion Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 313ndash24
Bernhardt B H and Stemberger J P 2000 Workbook in nonlinear phonology
for clinical application Austin TX ProEd
Bernthal J E and Bankson N W 1998 Articulation and phonological
disorders 4th edition Boston Allyn and Bacon
Bleile K M 1991 Individual differences In Bleile K M editor Child
phonology a book of exercises for students San Diego CA Singular 57ndash71
212 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Bleile K M 1995 Manual of articulation and phonological disorders San
Diego CA Singular
Bourgeois M S 1998 Functional outcome assessment of adults with
dementia Seminars in Speech and Hearing 19 261ndash75
Bowen C 2004 Child Language Teaching and Therapy 20 245ndash60
Campbell T F Dollaghan C A Rockette H E Paradise J L Feldman H
M Shriberg L D Sabo D L and Kurs-Lasky M 2003 Risk factors
for speech delay of unknown origin in 3-year-old children Child
Development 74 346ndash57
Chan A McAllister L and Wilson L 1998 An investigation of the agendash
MLU relationship and factors which predict MLU in two and three year
old Australian children Asia Pacific Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing 3 97ndash108
Christensen C A and Baker C D 2002 Pedagogy observation and
the construction of learning disability Pedagogy Culture and Society
10 73ndash93
Crowe Hall B J 1991 Attitudes of fourth and sixth graders toward peers with
mild articulation disorders Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 22 334ndash40
Duchan J F 2001a Impairment and social views of speech-language
pathology clinical practices re-examined Advances in Speech-Language
Pathology 3 37ndash46
Duchan J F 2001b Social and impairment approaches viewed in a forest and
in the shadows of a city street Advances in Speech-Language Pathology
3 73ndash79
Eadie T L 2003 The ICF A proposed framework for comprehensive
rehabilitation of individuals who use alaryngeal speech American
Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 12 189ndash97
Elbert M and Gierut J A 1986 Handbook of clinical phonology
approaches to assessment and treatment London Taylor amp Francis
Enderby P and John A 1997 Therapy outcome measures speech-language
pathology technical manual London Singular
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1992 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder linguistic
and personality results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35
1114ndash25
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1994 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder educational
and occupational results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37
1341ndash53
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 213
Flipsen P Shriberg L D Weismer G Karlsson H B and McSweeny J L
2001 Acoustic phenotypes for speech-genetics studies reference data for
residual =3= distortions Clinical Linguistics and Phonetics 15 603ndash30
Gibbon F E 1999 Undifferentiated lingual gestures in children with
articulation=phonological disorders Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing Research 42 382ndash97
Gierut J A 1998 Treatment efficacy functional phonological disorders in
children Journal of Speech Language Hearing Research 41 S85ndash100
Gierut J A Morrisette M L Hughes M T and Rowland S 1996
Phonological treatment efficacy and developmental norms Language
Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 27 215ndash30
Gillon G T 2000 The efficacy of phonological awareness intervention for
children with spoken language impairment Language Speech and Hear-
ing Services in Schools 31 126ndash41
Goldman R and Fristoe M 1986 Goldman Fristoe Test of Articulation
Revised Circle Pines MN American Guidance Service
Green B and Kostogriz A 2002 Learning difficulties and the new literacy
studies a socially critical perspective In Soler J Wearmouth J and
Reid G editors Contextualising difficulties in literacy development
exploring politics culture ethnicity and ethics Milton Keynes The Open
University
Griffin S Wilson L Clark L and McLeod S 2001 Speech pathology
applications of automatic speech recognition technology In Wilson L
and Hewat S editors Proceedings of the 2001 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
293ndash99
Golding-Kushner K 1995 Treatment of articulation and resonance disorders
associated with cleft palate and VPI In Shprintzen R and Bardach J
editors Cleft palate speech management a multidisciplinary approach
St Louis Mosby 327ndash63
Harasty J and Reed V A 1994 The prevalence of speech and language
impairment in two Sydney metropolitan schools Australian Journal of
Human Communication Disorders 22 1ndash23
Harding A and Grunwell P 1998 Active versus passive cleft-type speech
characteristics International Journal of Language and Communication
Disorders 33 329ndash52
Hersh D 1999 Impairment to empowerment social model theory and
aphasia therapy In McLeod S and McAllister L editors Proceedings
of the 1999 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 125ndash30
214 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Hodge M 1983 Assessment and treatment of a child with a developmental
speech disorder a biological behavioural perspective Seminars in Speech
and Language 14 128ndash41
Hodson B W 1994 Helping individuals become intelligible literate and
articulate the role of phonology Topics in Language Disorders 14 1ndash16
Hodson B W and Paden E P 1981 Phonological processes which
characterize unintelligible and intelligible speech in early childhood
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 46 369ndash73
James D van Doorn J and McLeod S 2002 Segment production in mono-
di- and polysyllabic words in children aged 3ndash7 years In Windsor F
Kelly L and Hewlett N editors Themes in Clinical Phonetics and
Linguistics Hillsdale NJ Lawrence Erlbaum 287ndash98
Jordan L and Kaiser W 1996 Aphasia a social approach London
Chapman and Hall
Kamhi A G 2000 Practice makes perfect the incompatibility of practicing
speech and meaningful communication Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 31 182ndash85
Kent R D Miolo G and Bloedel S 1994 The intelligibility of childrenrsquos
speech a review of evaluation procedures American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 3 81ndash95
Koegel L K Koegel R L and Costello-Ingham J 1986 Programming
rapid generalization of correct articulation through self-monitoring proce-
dures Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 24ndash32
Kovarsky D 2001 Ruminating on impairments-based assessment and inter-
vention Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 59ndash62
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1992 Intelligibility assessment in
developmental phonological disorders accuracy of caregiver gloss
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35 1095ndash1104
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1993 Speech normalization in develop-
mental phonological disorders a retrospective study of capability-focus
theory Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 24 10ndash18
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1998 The capability-focus treatment
framework for child speech disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 7 27ndash38
Lai C S L Fisher S E Hurst J A Vargha-Khadem F and Monaco A P
2001 A forkhead-domain gene is mutated in severe speech and language
disorder Nature 413 519ndash23
Larrivee L S and Catts H W 1999 Early reading achievement in children
with expressive phonological disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 8 118ndash28
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 215
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
attitudes toward the labelling of a child with a speech or language impairment
can influence the type of goals developed for a child (Christensen and Baker
2002 Green and Kostogriz 2002) For example McDermott (1993 272) has
argued that lsquothere is no such thing as LD [Learning Disability] only a social
practice of displaying noticing documenting remediating and explaining itrsquo
McLeod (2003) described the distinction between the use of the terms
lsquonormalrsquo and lsquotypicalrsquo and SLTsrsquo role in the categorization of children along
the normalndashabnormal divide Simmons-Mackie (2001) described differing
clinical assumptions leading to differing intervention approaches A childrsquos
experiences of receiving intervention from different people with differing
clinical assumptions is documented by Kovarsky (2001) Thus services
systems and policies can play a role in goal setting for children with speech
impairment
Personal factors
Attached to every lsquospeech impairmentrsquo is a real child (Bleile 1991) His or her
unique makeup must be considered within his=her cultural milieu in order to
determine the most appropriate intervention goals The ICF (WHO 2001 8)
recognizes the lsquolarge social and cultural variancersquo including gender age other
health conditions coping style social background education profession past
experience and character style Currently research into typically developing
children has demonstrated the wide range of individual differences (for
example McLeod et al 2001) For children with speech impairment there
are some case studies documenting the effect of personal factors on appro-
priate goal setting and intervention outcomes For example Kamhi (2000)
describes the progress of phonological intervention with his daughter Franne
Frannersquos lsquostubbornnessrsquo and desire to communicate with her parents led to
delineation between speech sound practice with her SLT and meaningful
communication with her parents He writes lsquoFrannersquos reluctance to practise
speech sounds was her way to let us know that we should focus on what
she said when she spoke rather than on how she said itrsquo (Kamhi 2000 183)
One important and documented factor to consider in the selection of speech
goals is the childrsquos personal ability to evaluate his=her speech Self-evaluation
occurs when the child judges the accuracy of his=her response prior to explicit
feedback from the clinician (cf Koegel et al 1986) lsquoSelf-evaluation appears
to be a central concept within diverse theoretical views of normal speech
development and within approaches to and explications of successful
interventionrsquo (Shriberg and Kwiatkowski 1987 154) Thus SLTs can incor-
porate self-evaluation within the intervention goals
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 211
Conclusion What goals are appropriate
It can be argued that the ultimate goal of speech intervention is to bring about
correct production of speech sounds resulting in intelligible conversational
speech within a childrsquos milieu (cf Kamhi 2000 Powell 1991) However
other similarly important goals may be to enhance a childrsquos participation in
social interaction to increase self-esteem or to decrease negative societal
attitudes towards people with speech impairment The ICF is a meta-theory
that allows for consideration of all these possibilities and is enhanced by
collaboration between SLTs and teachers A summary of possible goals
relating to the ICF is provided in Table 1 The most important outcome of
the present discussion is to reiterate that every child is unique requiring a
different approach to best meet their needs (Lowe 1994) Thus it is important
to consider all the factors before making a decision then to devise goals in
consultation and monitor progress (see Baker and McLeod this issue)
Continual revision and consultation will result in appropriate outcomes for
individual children as well as society
References
American Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Scope of practice in
speech-language pathology Rockville MD ASHA
Anderson R J and Antonak R F 1992 The influence of attitudes and
contact on reactions to persons with physical and speech disabilities
Rehabilitation Counselling Bulletin 35 240ndash47
Anthony A Bogle D Ingram T T S and McIsaac M W 1971 The
Edinburgh articulation test Edinburgh E and S Livingstone
Baker E and McLeod S 2004 Evidence-based management of children with
phonological impairment of unknown origin Child Language Teaching
and Therapy 20 261ndash85
Ball M J Gracco V and Stone M 2001 A comparison of imaging
techniques for the investigation of normal and disordered speech produc-
tion Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 313ndash24
Bernhardt B H and Stemberger J P 2000 Workbook in nonlinear phonology
for clinical application Austin TX ProEd
Bernthal J E and Bankson N W 1998 Articulation and phonological
disorders 4th edition Boston Allyn and Bacon
Bleile K M 1991 Individual differences In Bleile K M editor Child
phonology a book of exercises for students San Diego CA Singular 57ndash71
212 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Bleile K M 1995 Manual of articulation and phonological disorders San
Diego CA Singular
Bourgeois M S 1998 Functional outcome assessment of adults with
dementia Seminars in Speech and Hearing 19 261ndash75
Bowen C 2004 Child Language Teaching and Therapy 20 245ndash60
Campbell T F Dollaghan C A Rockette H E Paradise J L Feldman H
M Shriberg L D Sabo D L and Kurs-Lasky M 2003 Risk factors
for speech delay of unknown origin in 3-year-old children Child
Development 74 346ndash57
Chan A McAllister L and Wilson L 1998 An investigation of the agendash
MLU relationship and factors which predict MLU in two and three year
old Australian children Asia Pacific Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing 3 97ndash108
Christensen C A and Baker C D 2002 Pedagogy observation and
the construction of learning disability Pedagogy Culture and Society
10 73ndash93
Crowe Hall B J 1991 Attitudes of fourth and sixth graders toward peers with
mild articulation disorders Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 22 334ndash40
Duchan J F 2001a Impairment and social views of speech-language
pathology clinical practices re-examined Advances in Speech-Language
Pathology 3 37ndash46
Duchan J F 2001b Social and impairment approaches viewed in a forest and
in the shadows of a city street Advances in Speech-Language Pathology
3 73ndash79
Eadie T L 2003 The ICF A proposed framework for comprehensive
rehabilitation of individuals who use alaryngeal speech American
Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 12 189ndash97
Elbert M and Gierut J A 1986 Handbook of clinical phonology
approaches to assessment and treatment London Taylor amp Francis
Enderby P and John A 1997 Therapy outcome measures speech-language
pathology technical manual London Singular
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1992 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder linguistic
and personality results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35
1114ndash25
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1994 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder educational
and occupational results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37
1341ndash53
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 213
Flipsen P Shriberg L D Weismer G Karlsson H B and McSweeny J L
2001 Acoustic phenotypes for speech-genetics studies reference data for
residual =3= distortions Clinical Linguistics and Phonetics 15 603ndash30
Gibbon F E 1999 Undifferentiated lingual gestures in children with
articulation=phonological disorders Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing Research 42 382ndash97
Gierut J A 1998 Treatment efficacy functional phonological disorders in
children Journal of Speech Language Hearing Research 41 S85ndash100
Gierut J A Morrisette M L Hughes M T and Rowland S 1996
Phonological treatment efficacy and developmental norms Language
Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 27 215ndash30
Gillon G T 2000 The efficacy of phonological awareness intervention for
children with spoken language impairment Language Speech and Hear-
ing Services in Schools 31 126ndash41
Goldman R and Fristoe M 1986 Goldman Fristoe Test of Articulation
Revised Circle Pines MN American Guidance Service
Green B and Kostogriz A 2002 Learning difficulties and the new literacy
studies a socially critical perspective In Soler J Wearmouth J and
Reid G editors Contextualising difficulties in literacy development
exploring politics culture ethnicity and ethics Milton Keynes The Open
University
Griffin S Wilson L Clark L and McLeod S 2001 Speech pathology
applications of automatic speech recognition technology In Wilson L
and Hewat S editors Proceedings of the 2001 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
293ndash99
Golding-Kushner K 1995 Treatment of articulation and resonance disorders
associated with cleft palate and VPI In Shprintzen R and Bardach J
editors Cleft palate speech management a multidisciplinary approach
St Louis Mosby 327ndash63
Harasty J and Reed V A 1994 The prevalence of speech and language
impairment in two Sydney metropolitan schools Australian Journal of
Human Communication Disorders 22 1ndash23
Harding A and Grunwell P 1998 Active versus passive cleft-type speech
characteristics International Journal of Language and Communication
Disorders 33 329ndash52
Hersh D 1999 Impairment to empowerment social model theory and
aphasia therapy In McLeod S and McAllister L editors Proceedings
of the 1999 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 125ndash30
214 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Hodge M 1983 Assessment and treatment of a child with a developmental
speech disorder a biological behavioural perspective Seminars in Speech
and Language 14 128ndash41
Hodson B W 1994 Helping individuals become intelligible literate and
articulate the role of phonology Topics in Language Disorders 14 1ndash16
Hodson B W and Paden E P 1981 Phonological processes which
characterize unintelligible and intelligible speech in early childhood
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 46 369ndash73
James D van Doorn J and McLeod S 2002 Segment production in mono-
di- and polysyllabic words in children aged 3ndash7 years In Windsor F
Kelly L and Hewlett N editors Themes in Clinical Phonetics and
Linguistics Hillsdale NJ Lawrence Erlbaum 287ndash98
Jordan L and Kaiser W 1996 Aphasia a social approach London
Chapman and Hall
Kamhi A G 2000 Practice makes perfect the incompatibility of practicing
speech and meaningful communication Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 31 182ndash85
Kent R D Miolo G and Bloedel S 1994 The intelligibility of childrenrsquos
speech a review of evaluation procedures American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 3 81ndash95
Koegel L K Koegel R L and Costello-Ingham J 1986 Programming
rapid generalization of correct articulation through self-monitoring proce-
dures Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 24ndash32
Kovarsky D 2001 Ruminating on impairments-based assessment and inter-
vention Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 59ndash62
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1992 Intelligibility assessment in
developmental phonological disorders accuracy of caregiver gloss
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35 1095ndash1104
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1993 Speech normalization in develop-
mental phonological disorders a retrospective study of capability-focus
theory Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 24 10ndash18
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1998 The capability-focus treatment
framework for child speech disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 7 27ndash38
Lai C S L Fisher S E Hurst J A Vargha-Khadem F and Monaco A P
2001 A forkhead-domain gene is mutated in severe speech and language
disorder Nature 413 519ndash23
Larrivee L S and Catts H W 1999 Early reading achievement in children
with expressive phonological disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 8 118ndash28
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 215
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
Conclusion What goals are appropriate
It can be argued that the ultimate goal of speech intervention is to bring about
correct production of speech sounds resulting in intelligible conversational
speech within a childrsquos milieu (cf Kamhi 2000 Powell 1991) However
other similarly important goals may be to enhance a childrsquos participation in
social interaction to increase self-esteem or to decrease negative societal
attitudes towards people with speech impairment The ICF is a meta-theory
that allows for consideration of all these possibilities and is enhanced by
collaboration between SLTs and teachers A summary of possible goals
relating to the ICF is provided in Table 1 The most important outcome of
the present discussion is to reiterate that every child is unique requiring a
different approach to best meet their needs (Lowe 1994) Thus it is important
to consider all the factors before making a decision then to devise goals in
consultation and monitor progress (see Baker and McLeod this issue)
Continual revision and consultation will result in appropriate outcomes for
individual children as well as society
References
American Speech-Language-Hearing Association 2001 Scope of practice in
speech-language pathology Rockville MD ASHA
Anderson R J and Antonak R F 1992 The influence of attitudes and
contact on reactions to persons with physical and speech disabilities
Rehabilitation Counselling Bulletin 35 240ndash47
Anthony A Bogle D Ingram T T S and McIsaac M W 1971 The
Edinburgh articulation test Edinburgh E and S Livingstone
Baker E and McLeod S 2004 Evidence-based management of children with
phonological impairment of unknown origin Child Language Teaching
and Therapy 20 261ndash85
Ball M J Gracco V and Stone M 2001 A comparison of imaging
techniques for the investigation of normal and disordered speech produc-
tion Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 313ndash24
Bernhardt B H and Stemberger J P 2000 Workbook in nonlinear phonology
for clinical application Austin TX ProEd
Bernthal J E and Bankson N W 1998 Articulation and phonological
disorders 4th edition Boston Allyn and Bacon
Bleile K M 1991 Individual differences In Bleile K M editor Child
phonology a book of exercises for students San Diego CA Singular 57ndash71
212 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Bleile K M 1995 Manual of articulation and phonological disorders San
Diego CA Singular
Bourgeois M S 1998 Functional outcome assessment of adults with
dementia Seminars in Speech and Hearing 19 261ndash75
Bowen C 2004 Child Language Teaching and Therapy 20 245ndash60
Campbell T F Dollaghan C A Rockette H E Paradise J L Feldman H
M Shriberg L D Sabo D L and Kurs-Lasky M 2003 Risk factors
for speech delay of unknown origin in 3-year-old children Child
Development 74 346ndash57
Chan A McAllister L and Wilson L 1998 An investigation of the agendash
MLU relationship and factors which predict MLU in two and three year
old Australian children Asia Pacific Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing 3 97ndash108
Christensen C A and Baker C D 2002 Pedagogy observation and
the construction of learning disability Pedagogy Culture and Society
10 73ndash93
Crowe Hall B J 1991 Attitudes of fourth and sixth graders toward peers with
mild articulation disorders Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 22 334ndash40
Duchan J F 2001a Impairment and social views of speech-language
pathology clinical practices re-examined Advances in Speech-Language
Pathology 3 37ndash46
Duchan J F 2001b Social and impairment approaches viewed in a forest and
in the shadows of a city street Advances in Speech-Language Pathology
3 73ndash79
Eadie T L 2003 The ICF A proposed framework for comprehensive
rehabilitation of individuals who use alaryngeal speech American
Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 12 189ndash97
Elbert M and Gierut J A 1986 Handbook of clinical phonology
approaches to assessment and treatment London Taylor amp Francis
Enderby P and John A 1997 Therapy outcome measures speech-language
pathology technical manual London Singular
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1992 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder linguistic
and personality results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35
1114ndash25
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1994 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder educational
and occupational results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37
1341ndash53
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 213
Flipsen P Shriberg L D Weismer G Karlsson H B and McSweeny J L
2001 Acoustic phenotypes for speech-genetics studies reference data for
residual =3= distortions Clinical Linguistics and Phonetics 15 603ndash30
Gibbon F E 1999 Undifferentiated lingual gestures in children with
articulation=phonological disorders Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing Research 42 382ndash97
Gierut J A 1998 Treatment efficacy functional phonological disorders in
children Journal of Speech Language Hearing Research 41 S85ndash100
Gierut J A Morrisette M L Hughes M T and Rowland S 1996
Phonological treatment efficacy and developmental norms Language
Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 27 215ndash30
Gillon G T 2000 The efficacy of phonological awareness intervention for
children with spoken language impairment Language Speech and Hear-
ing Services in Schools 31 126ndash41
Goldman R and Fristoe M 1986 Goldman Fristoe Test of Articulation
Revised Circle Pines MN American Guidance Service
Green B and Kostogriz A 2002 Learning difficulties and the new literacy
studies a socially critical perspective In Soler J Wearmouth J and
Reid G editors Contextualising difficulties in literacy development
exploring politics culture ethnicity and ethics Milton Keynes The Open
University
Griffin S Wilson L Clark L and McLeod S 2001 Speech pathology
applications of automatic speech recognition technology In Wilson L
and Hewat S editors Proceedings of the 2001 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
293ndash99
Golding-Kushner K 1995 Treatment of articulation and resonance disorders
associated with cleft palate and VPI In Shprintzen R and Bardach J
editors Cleft palate speech management a multidisciplinary approach
St Louis Mosby 327ndash63
Harasty J and Reed V A 1994 The prevalence of speech and language
impairment in two Sydney metropolitan schools Australian Journal of
Human Communication Disorders 22 1ndash23
Harding A and Grunwell P 1998 Active versus passive cleft-type speech
characteristics International Journal of Language and Communication
Disorders 33 329ndash52
Hersh D 1999 Impairment to empowerment social model theory and
aphasia therapy In McLeod S and McAllister L editors Proceedings
of the 1999 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 125ndash30
214 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Hodge M 1983 Assessment and treatment of a child with a developmental
speech disorder a biological behavioural perspective Seminars in Speech
and Language 14 128ndash41
Hodson B W 1994 Helping individuals become intelligible literate and
articulate the role of phonology Topics in Language Disorders 14 1ndash16
Hodson B W and Paden E P 1981 Phonological processes which
characterize unintelligible and intelligible speech in early childhood
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 46 369ndash73
James D van Doorn J and McLeod S 2002 Segment production in mono-
di- and polysyllabic words in children aged 3ndash7 years In Windsor F
Kelly L and Hewlett N editors Themes in Clinical Phonetics and
Linguistics Hillsdale NJ Lawrence Erlbaum 287ndash98
Jordan L and Kaiser W 1996 Aphasia a social approach London
Chapman and Hall
Kamhi A G 2000 Practice makes perfect the incompatibility of practicing
speech and meaningful communication Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 31 182ndash85
Kent R D Miolo G and Bloedel S 1994 The intelligibility of childrenrsquos
speech a review of evaluation procedures American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 3 81ndash95
Koegel L K Koegel R L and Costello-Ingham J 1986 Programming
rapid generalization of correct articulation through self-monitoring proce-
dures Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 24ndash32
Kovarsky D 2001 Ruminating on impairments-based assessment and inter-
vention Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 59ndash62
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1992 Intelligibility assessment in
developmental phonological disorders accuracy of caregiver gloss
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35 1095ndash1104
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1993 Speech normalization in develop-
mental phonological disorders a retrospective study of capability-focus
theory Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 24 10ndash18
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1998 The capability-focus treatment
framework for child speech disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 7 27ndash38
Lai C S L Fisher S E Hurst J A Vargha-Khadem F and Monaco A P
2001 A forkhead-domain gene is mutated in severe speech and language
disorder Nature 413 519ndash23
Larrivee L S and Catts H W 1999 Early reading achievement in children
with expressive phonological disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 8 118ndash28
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 215
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
Bleile K M 1995 Manual of articulation and phonological disorders San
Diego CA Singular
Bourgeois M S 1998 Functional outcome assessment of adults with
dementia Seminars in Speech and Hearing 19 261ndash75
Bowen C 2004 Child Language Teaching and Therapy 20 245ndash60
Campbell T F Dollaghan C A Rockette H E Paradise J L Feldman H
M Shriberg L D Sabo D L and Kurs-Lasky M 2003 Risk factors
for speech delay of unknown origin in 3-year-old children Child
Development 74 346ndash57
Chan A McAllister L and Wilson L 1998 An investigation of the agendash
MLU relationship and factors which predict MLU in two and three year
old Australian children Asia Pacific Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing 3 97ndash108
Christensen C A and Baker C D 2002 Pedagogy observation and
the construction of learning disability Pedagogy Culture and Society
10 73ndash93
Crowe Hall B J 1991 Attitudes of fourth and sixth graders toward peers with
mild articulation disorders Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 22 334ndash40
Duchan J F 2001a Impairment and social views of speech-language
pathology clinical practices re-examined Advances in Speech-Language
Pathology 3 37ndash46
Duchan J F 2001b Social and impairment approaches viewed in a forest and
in the shadows of a city street Advances in Speech-Language Pathology
3 73ndash79
Eadie T L 2003 The ICF A proposed framework for comprehensive
rehabilitation of individuals who use alaryngeal speech American
Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 12 189ndash97
Elbert M and Gierut J A 1986 Handbook of clinical phonology
approaches to assessment and treatment London Taylor amp Francis
Enderby P and John A 1997 Therapy outcome measures speech-language
pathology technical manual London Singular
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1992 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder linguistic
and personality results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35
1114ndash25
Felsenfeld S Broen P A and McGue M 1994 A 28-year follow-up of
adults with a history of moderate phonological disorder educational
and occupational results Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37
1341ndash53
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 213
Flipsen P Shriberg L D Weismer G Karlsson H B and McSweeny J L
2001 Acoustic phenotypes for speech-genetics studies reference data for
residual =3= distortions Clinical Linguistics and Phonetics 15 603ndash30
Gibbon F E 1999 Undifferentiated lingual gestures in children with
articulation=phonological disorders Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing Research 42 382ndash97
Gierut J A 1998 Treatment efficacy functional phonological disorders in
children Journal of Speech Language Hearing Research 41 S85ndash100
Gierut J A Morrisette M L Hughes M T and Rowland S 1996
Phonological treatment efficacy and developmental norms Language
Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 27 215ndash30
Gillon G T 2000 The efficacy of phonological awareness intervention for
children with spoken language impairment Language Speech and Hear-
ing Services in Schools 31 126ndash41
Goldman R and Fristoe M 1986 Goldman Fristoe Test of Articulation
Revised Circle Pines MN American Guidance Service
Green B and Kostogriz A 2002 Learning difficulties and the new literacy
studies a socially critical perspective In Soler J Wearmouth J and
Reid G editors Contextualising difficulties in literacy development
exploring politics culture ethnicity and ethics Milton Keynes The Open
University
Griffin S Wilson L Clark L and McLeod S 2001 Speech pathology
applications of automatic speech recognition technology In Wilson L
and Hewat S editors Proceedings of the 2001 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
293ndash99
Golding-Kushner K 1995 Treatment of articulation and resonance disorders
associated with cleft palate and VPI In Shprintzen R and Bardach J
editors Cleft palate speech management a multidisciplinary approach
St Louis Mosby 327ndash63
Harasty J and Reed V A 1994 The prevalence of speech and language
impairment in two Sydney metropolitan schools Australian Journal of
Human Communication Disorders 22 1ndash23
Harding A and Grunwell P 1998 Active versus passive cleft-type speech
characteristics International Journal of Language and Communication
Disorders 33 329ndash52
Hersh D 1999 Impairment to empowerment social model theory and
aphasia therapy In McLeod S and McAllister L editors Proceedings
of the 1999 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 125ndash30
214 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Hodge M 1983 Assessment and treatment of a child with a developmental
speech disorder a biological behavioural perspective Seminars in Speech
and Language 14 128ndash41
Hodson B W 1994 Helping individuals become intelligible literate and
articulate the role of phonology Topics in Language Disorders 14 1ndash16
Hodson B W and Paden E P 1981 Phonological processes which
characterize unintelligible and intelligible speech in early childhood
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 46 369ndash73
James D van Doorn J and McLeod S 2002 Segment production in mono-
di- and polysyllabic words in children aged 3ndash7 years In Windsor F
Kelly L and Hewlett N editors Themes in Clinical Phonetics and
Linguistics Hillsdale NJ Lawrence Erlbaum 287ndash98
Jordan L and Kaiser W 1996 Aphasia a social approach London
Chapman and Hall
Kamhi A G 2000 Practice makes perfect the incompatibility of practicing
speech and meaningful communication Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 31 182ndash85
Kent R D Miolo G and Bloedel S 1994 The intelligibility of childrenrsquos
speech a review of evaluation procedures American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 3 81ndash95
Koegel L K Koegel R L and Costello-Ingham J 1986 Programming
rapid generalization of correct articulation through self-monitoring proce-
dures Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 24ndash32
Kovarsky D 2001 Ruminating on impairments-based assessment and inter-
vention Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 59ndash62
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1992 Intelligibility assessment in
developmental phonological disorders accuracy of caregiver gloss
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35 1095ndash1104
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1993 Speech normalization in develop-
mental phonological disorders a retrospective study of capability-focus
theory Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 24 10ndash18
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1998 The capability-focus treatment
framework for child speech disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 7 27ndash38
Lai C S L Fisher S E Hurst J A Vargha-Khadem F and Monaco A P
2001 A forkhead-domain gene is mutated in severe speech and language
disorder Nature 413 519ndash23
Larrivee L S and Catts H W 1999 Early reading achievement in children
with expressive phonological disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 8 118ndash28
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 215
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
Flipsen P Shriberg L D Weismer G Karlsson H B and McSweeny J L
2001 Acoustic phenotypes for speech-genetics studies reference data for
residual =3= distortions Clinical Linguistics and Phonetics 15 603ndash30
Gibbon F E 1999 Undifferentiated lingual gestures in children with
articulation=phonological disorders Journal of Speech Language and
Hearing Research 42 382ndash97
Gierut J A 1998 Treatment efficacy functional phonological disorders in
children Journal of Speech Language Hearing Research 41 S85ndash100
Gierut J A Morrisette M L Hughes M T and Rowland S 1996
Phonological treatment efficacy and developmental norms Language
Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 27 215ndash30
Gillon G T 2000 The efficacy of phonological awareness intervention for
children with spoken language impairment Language Speech and Hear-
ing Services in Schools 31 126ndash41
Goldman R and Fristoe M 1986 Goldman Fristoe Test of Articulation
Revised Circle Pines MN American Guidance Service
Green B and Kostogriz A 2002 Learning difficulties and the new literacy
studies a socially critical perspective In Soler J Wearmouth J and
Reid G editors Contextualising difficulties in literacy development
exploring politics culture ethnicity and ethics Milton Keynes The Open
University
Griffin S Wilson L Clark L and McLeod S 2001 Speech pathology
applications of automatic speech recognition technology In Wilson L
and Hewat S editors Proceedings of the 2001 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
293ndash99
Golding-Kushner K 1995 Treatment of articulation and resonance disorders
associated with cleft palate and VPI In Shprintzen R and Bardach J
editors Cleft palate speech management a multidisciplinary approach
St Louis Mosby 327ndash63
Harasty J and Reed V A 1994 The prevalence of speech and language
impairment in two Sydney metropolitan schools Australian Journal of
Human Communication Disorders 22 1ndash23
Harding A and Grunwell P 1998 Active versus passive cleft-type speech
characteristics International Journal of Language and Communication
Disorders 33 329ndash52
Hersh D 1999 Impairment to empowerment social model theory and
aphasia therapy In McLeod S and McAllister L editors Proceedings
of the 1999 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 125ndash30
214 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
Hodge M 1983 Assessment and treatment of a child with a developmental
speech disorder a biological behavioural perspective Seminars in Speech
and Language 14 128ndash41
Hodson B W 1994 Helping individuals become intelligible literate and
articulate the role of phonology Topics in Language Disorders 14 1ndash16
Hodson B W and Paden E P 1981 Phonological processes which
characterize unintelligible and intelligible speech in early childhood
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 46 369ndash73
James D van Doorn J and McLeod S 2002 Segment production in mono-
di- and polysyllabic words in children aged 3ndash7 years In Windsor F
Kelly L and Hewlett N editors Themes in Clinical Phonetics and
Linguistics Hillsdale NJ Lawrence Erlbaum 287ndash98
Jordan L and Kaiser W 1996 Aphasia a social approach London
Chapman and Hall
Kamhi A G 2000 Practice makes perfect the incompatibility of practicing
speech and meaningful communication Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 31 182ndash85
Kent R D Miolo G and Bloedel S 1994 The intelligibility of childrenrsquos
speech a review of evaluation procedures American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 3 81ndash95
Koegel L K Koegel R L and Costello-Ingham J 1986 Programming
rapid generalization of correct articulation through self-monitoring proce-
dures Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 24ndash32
Kovarsky D 2001 Ruminating on impairments-based assessment and inter-
vention Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 59ndash62
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1992 Intelligibility assessment in
developmental phonological disorders accuracy of caregiver gloss
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35 1095ndash1104
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1993 Speech normalization in develop-
mental phonological disorders a retrospective study of capability-focus
theory Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 24 10ndash18
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1998 The capability-focus treatment
framework for child speech disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 7 27ndash38
Lai C S L Fisher S E Hurst J A Vargha-Khadem F and Monaco A P
2001 A forkhead-domain gene is mutated in severe speech and language
disorder Nature 413 519ndash23
Larrivee L S and Catts H W 1999 Early reading achievement in children
with expressive phonological disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 8 118ndash28
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 215
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
Hodge M 1983 Assessment and treatment of a child with a developmental
speech disorder a biological behavioural perspective Seminars in Speech
and Language 14 128ndash41
Hodson B W 1994 Helping individuals become intelligible literate and
articulate the role of phonology Topics in Language Disorders 14 1ndash16
Hodson B W and Paden E P 1981 Phonological processes which
characterize unintelligible and intelligible speech in early childhood
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 46 369ndash73
James D van Doorn J and McLeod S 2002 Segment production in mono-
di- and polysyllabic words in children aged 3ndash7 years In Windsor F
Kelly L and Hewlett N editors Themes in Clinical Phonetics and
Linguistics Hillsdale NJ Lawrence Erlbaum 287ndash98
Jordan L and Kaiser W 1996 Aphasia a social approach London
Chapman and Hall
Kamhi A G 2000 Practice makes perfect the incompatibility of practicing
speech and meaningful communication Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 31 182ndash85
Kent R D Miolo G and Bloedel S 1994 The intelligibility of childrenrsquos
speech a review of evaluation procedures American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 3 81ndash95
Koegel L K Koegel R L and Costello-Ingham J 1986 Programming
rapid generalization of correct articulation through self-monitoring proce-
dures Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 24ndash32
Kovarsky D 2001 Ruminating on impairments-based assessment and inter-
vention Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 59ndash62
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1992 Intelligibility assessment in
developmental phonological disorders accuracy of caregiver gloss
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 35 1095ndash1104
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1993 Speech normalization in develop-
mental phonological disorders a retrospective study of capability-focus
theory Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 24 10ndash18
Kwiatkowski J and Shriberg L D 1998 The capability-focus treatment
framework for child speech disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 7 27ndash38
Lai C S L Fisher S E Hurst J A Vargha-Khadem F and Monaco A P
2001 A forkhead-domain gene is mutated in severe speech and language
disorder Nature 413 519ndash23
Larrivee L S and Catts H W 1999 Early reading achievement in children
with expressive phonological disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology 8 118ndash28
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 215
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
Leonard L B Schwartz R G Folger M K and Wilcox M J 1978 Some
aspects of child phonology in imitative and spontaneous speech Journal
of Child Language 5 403ndash15
Lewis B A and Freebairn L 1993 A clinical tool for evaluating the familial
basis of speech and language disorders American Journal of Speech-
Language Pathology May 38ndash43
Lewis B A Ekelman B L and Aram D M 1989 A familial study of
severe phonological disorders Journal of Speech and Hearing Research
32 713ndash24
Lewis B A Freebairn L A and Taylor H G 2000 Academic outcomes in
children with histories of speech sound disorders Journal of Commu-
nication Disorders 33 11ndash30
Locke J L 2000 The treatment of language disordered children a potentially
helpful theory Acquiring Knowledge in Speech Language and Hearing
3 3ndash6
Lof G L 2003 Oral motor exercises and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 7ndash11
Long S H Fey M E and Channell R W 2002 Computerized Profiling
(Version MS-DOS version 91 Cleveland OH Case Western Reserve
University
Lowe R J 1994 Phonology assessment and intervention application in
speech pathology Baltimore Williams and Wilkins
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001a Clinical voice assessment II assessing
voice activity limitation and participant restriction Acquiring Knowledge
in Speech Language and Hearing 3 69ndash73
Ma E P-M and Yiu E M-L 2001b Voice activity and participation profile
assessing the impact of voice disorders Journal of Speech Language
and Hearing Research 44 511ndash24
Madison C L 1992 Attitudes toward mild misarticulation-disordered peers
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 23 188
Masterson J and Bernhardt B H 2002 CAPES Computerized Articulation
and Phonology Evaluation System [Computer Program version 101]
San Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
McDermott R P 1993 The acquisition of a child by a learning disability In
Chaiklin S and Lave J editors Understanding practice perspectives on
activity and context Cambridge Cambridge University Press
McLeod S 2003 Normal speech development a framework for assessment
and intervention In Williams C and Leitao S editors Proceedings of
the 2003 Speech Pathology Australia National Conference Melbourne
Speech Pathology Australia 57ndash63
216 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
McLeod S Hand L Rosenthal J B and Hayes B 1994 The effect of
sampling condition on childrenrsquos productions of consonant clusters
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research 37 868ndash82
McLeod S van Doorn J and Reed V A 2001 Consonant cluster devel-
opment in two-year-olds general trends and individual difference Jour-
nal of Speech Language Hearing Research 44 1144ndash171
Mid Western Area Health Service (1999) Healthy little ears Orange
Australia printWest Western Institute of TAFE
Morrison J A and Shriberg L D 1992 Articulation testing versus
conversational speech sampling Journal of Speech and Hearing
Research 35 259ndash73
Morrisette M L and Gierut J A 2003 Unified treatment recommendations
a response to Rvachew and Nowak (2001) Journal of Speech Language
Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
Nelson N W 1989 Curriculum-based language assessment and intervention
Language Speech and Hearing Services in Schools 20 170ndash84
Ozanne A E 1992 Normative data for sequenced oral movements and
movements in context for children aged three to five years Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders 20 47ndash63
Powell T W 1991 Planning for phonological generalization an approach
to treatment target selection American Journal of Speech-Language-
Pathology 1 21ndash27
Powell T W and Miccio A W 1996 Stimulability a useful clinical tool
Journal of Communication Disorders 29 237ndash53
Powell T W 2003 Stimulability and treatment outcomes Perspectives on
Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 3ndash6
Pretty S 1995 Letter to the editor Australian Communication Quarterly
Winter 3
Reynolds M C 1984 Classification of students with handicaps In
Gordon E W editor Review of research in education Vol II
Washington DC American Educational Research Journal
Robbins J and Klee T 1987 Clinical assessment of oropharyngeal motor
development in young children Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders 52 271ndash77
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2001 The effect of target selection strategy on
phonological learning Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 44 610ndash23
Rvachew S and Nowak M 2003 Clinical outcomes as a function of target
selection strategy a response to Morrisette and Gierut (2001) Journal of
Speech Language Hearing Research 46 382ndash89
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 217
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
Shriberg L D and Kwiatkowski J 1987 A retrospective study of sponta-
neous generalization in speech-delayed children Language Speech and
Hearing Services in Schools 18 144ndash57
Shriberg L D Kwiatkowski J Best S Hengst J and Terselic-Weber B
1986 Characteristics of children with phonologic disorders of unknown
origin Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders 51 140ndash61
Shriberg L D Flipsen P Jr Thielke H Kwiatkowski J Kertoy M Nellis
R and Block M 2000a Risk for speech disorder associated with early
recurrent otitis media with effusion two retrospective studies Journal of
Speech Language and Hearing Research 43 79ndash99
Shriberg L D Friel-Patti S Flipsen P Jr and Brown R L 2000b Otitis
media fluctuant hearing loss and speech-language delay a preliminary
structural equation model Journal of Speech Language and Hearing
Research 43 100ndash20
Silverman F H and Paulus P G 1989 Peer reactions to teenagers who
substitute =w= for =r= Language Speech and Hearing Services in
Schools 20 219ndash21
Silverman F H and Falk S M 1992 Attitudes of teenagers toward peers
who have a single articulation error Language Speech and Hearing
Services in Schools 23 187
Simmons-Mackie N 2001 Social approaches in clinical practice examining
clinical assumptions Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 47ndash50
Smit A B 1993 Phonologic error distributions in the IowandashNebraska
articulation norms project consonant singletons Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research 36 533ndash47
Stackhouse J and Wells B 1993 Psycholinguistic assessment of develop-
mental speech disorders European Journal of Disorders of Communica-
tion 28 331ndash48
Threats T T 2000 The World Health Organisationrsquos revised classification
what does it mean for speech-language pathology Journal of Medical
Speech-Language Pathology 8 13ndash18
Threats T T 2001 New classifications will aid assessment and intervention
ASHA Leader 6 12ndash13
Wilcox K and Morris S 1999 Childrenrsquos speech intelligibility measure San
Antonio TX Psychological Corporation
Williams A L 2002 Prologue perspectives in the assessment of
childrenrsquos speech American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology 11
211ndash12
Williams A L 2003 Target selection and treatment outcomes Perspectives
on Language Learning and Education (ASHA Division 1) 10 12ndash16
218 Child Language Teaching and Therapy
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219
World Health Organization 1980 ICIDH International classification of
impairment disabilities and handicaps Geneva Switzerland WHO
World Health Organization 2001 ICF International classification of func-
tioning disability and health Geneva Switzerland WHO
Worrall L 1999 Speech pathology giving people a say in life In McLeod S
and McAllister L editors Proceedings of the 1999 Speech Pathology
Australia National Conference Melbourne Speech Pathology Australia
5ndash11
Worrall L 2001 The social approach another new fashion in speech-
language pathology Advances in Speech-Language Pathology 3 51ndash54
The ICF as a goal-setting framework 219